<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
<rss version="2.0">
<channel>
<title><![CDATA[BlueStrait - My Life, My Site - DIY]]></title>
<link>http://www.bluestrait.com/blog/</link>
<description><![CDATA[DIY, 数码, 程序, 生活]]></description>
<language>zh-cn</language>
<copyright><![CDATA[Copyright 2005 PBlog3 v2.8]]></copyright>
<webMaster><![CDATA[bluestrait@gmail.com(Min)]]></webMaster>
<generator>PBlog2 v2.4</generator> 
<image>
	<title>BlueStrait - My Life, My Site</title>
	<url>http://www.bluestrait.com/blog/images/logos.gif</url>
	<link>http://www.bluestrait.com/blog/</link>
	<description>BlueStrait - My Life, My Site</description>
</image>

			<item>
			<link>http://www.bluestrait.com/blog/article.asp?id=296</link>
			<title><![CDATA[膨胀螺栓 dynabolt 的使用]]></title>
			<author>bluestrait@gmail.com(黄敏)</author>
			<category><![CDATA[DIY]]></category>
			<pubDate>Sun,21 Feb 2010 18:48:59 +0800</pubDate>
			<guid>http://www.bluestrait.com/blog/default.asp?id=296</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[膨胀螺栓(dynabolt) 是适用于砖和水泥上的最坚固的固定方式。<br/><br/><img src="http://www.bluestrait.com/bluegallery/pictures/2010_02_garage_shelf/IMG_2545.jpg" border="0" alt=""/><br/>图中是6mm*600mm的螺栓。不过所有膨胀螺栓形状都差不多。一般直径越粗，承重系数越大。而长度的选择则与要固定的东西的厚度有关。<br/><br/>使用上挺简单的：<br/>1. 使用与螺栓同样直径的masnory bit，在砖上钻上dynabolt的推荐深度。比如这个60mm的dynabolt的推荐最小深度是40mm. <br/><br/>2. 然后在要固定的物件上打孔，孔的直径等于或稍大于dynabolt的外径。这样dynabolt就可以自由地穿在要固定的物件上。在这个挂架上就不需要这一步了，因为它已经有了预先钻好的孔。然后将螺栓穿在物件上，像下面：<br/><img src="http://www.bluestrait.com/bluegallery/pictures/2010_02_garage_shelf/IMG_2560.jpg" border="0" alt=""/><br/><br/>3. 然后带着底座插入在墙上钻好的洞，必要时使用锤子帮忙。<br/><br/>4. 最后用扳手拧dynabolt上的螺帽直到够紧为止。螺帽拧紧的同时，dynabolt的金属尾部会张开从而卡紧。<br/><br/>参看这段视频：<br/><a target="_blank" href="http://www.ezydrive.com.au/Videos/PolyFlexVideos/InstallationusingDynabolt/tabid/237/Default.aspx" rel="external">http://www.ezydrive.com.au/Videos/PolyFlexVideos/InstallationusingDynabolt/tabid/237/Default.aspx</a>]]></description>
		</item>
		
			<item>
			<link>http://www.bluestrait.com/blog/article.asp?id=295</link>
			<title><![CDATA[电视挂墙]]></title>
			<author>bluestrait@gmail.com(黄敏)</author>
			<category><![CDATA[DIY]]></category>
			<pubDate>Sun,21 Feb 2010 16:22:52 +0800</pubDate>
			<guid>http://www.bluestrait.com/blog/default.asp?id=295</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[楼下Rumpus room里有一个烧柴的壁炉，冬天点起来感觉还是很不错的。<br/><img src="http://www.bluestrait.com/bluegallery/pictures/2010_02_21_wallmount/img_2668.jpg" border="0" alt=""/><br/><br/>而这个房间里的50吋plasma 电视机是放在一个TV Bench上。所靠着的墙与火炉所在的墙成90度。<br/><img src="http://www.bluestrait.com/images/htpc/crw_2672_m.jpg" border="0" alt=""/><br/>这个摆放高度很低，甚至于低过躺在Recliner上时的眼睛所处的水平线，所以看电视时头还不自觉地要抬起一点来，不能完全靠在沙发上，总觉得不够尽兴。同时家里的小家伙们日渐调皮，整日里拿着各种能够着的任何东西往电视机屏幕上敲得叮叮当当响。<br/><br/>最糟糕的一点是这样的布局在房间里造成了两个互相干扰的视觉注意力中心，在美学上不甚令人满意。所以最后决定把电视机挂到壁炉上去。<br/><br/>上墙自然要选一个挂架了。比较常见的是这种：<br/><img src="http://images.marketplaceadvisor.channeladvisor.com/hi/68/68411/plb103l.bl.1.jpg" border="0" alt=""/><br/>一般AUD$70左右。一般是够用的了。<br/><br/>但是我最后选中的挂架是下面这款：<br/><a target="_blank" href="http://www.selbyacoustics.com.au/storefrontprofiles/default.aspx?sfid=74520" rel="external">42&#34;-70&#34; Plasma LCD Heavy Duty Wall Mount Bracket 100kg Black PLB110L</a><br/>Weight Capacity: 100kg <br/>Width: 760mm <br/>Height: 530mm&nbsp;&nbsp;<br/>Distance From Wall: 110mm - 520mm <br/>Tilt Option: 15 Degree <br/><img src="http://www.bluestrait.com/bluegallery/pictures/2010_02_21_wallmount/PLB110L_bk_1.jpg" border="0" alt=""/><br/><img src="http://www.bluestrait.com/bluegallery/pictures/2010_02_21_wallmount/PLB110L_bk_3.jpg" border="0" alt=""/><br/>花了AU$190购入。跟普通的$70块左右的挂架相比，这个挂架胜在够灵活：<br/>1. 可以调整倾斜度。因为要考虑壁炉使用时产生的热量，电视机不能靠壁炉太近，所以悬挂位置稍高。这样的话一定的向下的倾斜度是需要的，否则脖子看的受不了。实际上最后我是几乎调整到了它能容许的最大倾斜度15度。<br/>2. 纵深方向上可以拉出110mm - 520mm，这样可以调整观看距离。看全高清大片（及其它片, if you know what I mean :-)) 时可以拉近看清楚点。<br/>3. 左右还可以旋转至60度，不过这个对这个场合意义倒不大。<br/>4. 最大可悬挂的电视机到了70寸，方便以后升级（如果有这么一天的话 :-)）。<br/><br/>挂架的全部零配件<br/><img src="http://www.bluestrait.com/bluegallery/pictures/2010_02_21_wallmount/img_2670.jpg" border="0" alt=""/><br/>从左到右分别为：底座，固定到电视机背上的支架，各种固定螺丝，螺帽，垫片等等。<br/><br/>支架固定到电视机的背上很简单。现在的电视机一般都支持VESA标准，也就是背部有预留的标准大小的螺孔可供固定用。不同电视机可能直径不同，但应该都是标准的M4, M6 或M8等等。<br/><br/>下图就是我的Panasonic TH50P700A 电视机背上带的覆盖住这个固定螺孔的塑料帽子。不同电视机可能有不同的覆盖形式。<br/><img src="http://www.bluestrait.com/bluegallery/pictures/2010_02_21_wallmount/img_2669.jpg" border="0" alt=""/><br/>用一字螺丝刀轻轻在帽子的缺口处一撬就下来了。然后使用挂架配的4个M8*60螺丝加上垫圈等将两个独立的支架固定在电视机上，就可以等着挂上底座了。<br/><br/>所需工具很简单：<br/>1. 带有Impact Drill模式的电钻（要有冲击钻hammer drill那就更容易了，不过Impact Drill也将就够用了），水泥钻头 (masonry drill bit)<br/>2. 卷尺，水平仪<br/>3. 扳手，榔头<br/><img src="http://www.bluestrait.com/bluegallery/pictures/2010_02_garage_shelf/IMG_2559.jpg" border="0" alt=""/><br/><br/>固定在墙上的底座：<br/><img src="http://www.bluestrait.com/bluegallery/pictures/2010_02_21_wallmount/img_2671.jpg" border="0" alt=""/><br/>使用了六个8mm*65mm的膨胀螺栓固定在砖墙上。有了上次在车房里使用膨胀螺栓的经验，这次的打孔比较顺利了。有关膨胀螺栓的使用，请参看<a target="_blank" href="http://bluestrait.com/blog/article.asp?id=296" rel="external">我的另一篇小文</a>。<br/><br/>然后在老婆的帮助下把电视机挂在了底座上（真沉啊！一个人是绝对干不了这活的）。调整好倾斜角度后就基本完工了。整个过程包括清洁一个人搞了大概3个小时。<br/><br/><img src="http://www.bluestrait.com/bluegallery/pictures/2010_02_21_wallmount/img_2679.jpg" border="0" alt=""/><br/><br/><br/><img src="http://www.bluestrait.com/bluegallery/pictures/2010_02_21_wallmount/img_2676.jpg" border="0" alt=""/><br/>可以看到电视机屏幕与recliner沙发形成的角度。基本上躺下来后把头完全靠在靠背上时眼睛与电视的中线是在一条线上的。看电视时将recliner沙发展开，躺在上面，感觉挺好，终于可以完全放松躺下来了。<br/><br/>最后把线整理好之后的效果：<br/><img src="http://www.bluestrait.com/bluegallery/pictures/2010_02_21_wallmount/img_2687.jpg" border="0" alt=""/><br/>电视机左右的是原来支撑壁炉上的横板的支架，还没来得及拆下来。壁炉边上的架子上堆的是HTPC, NAD立体声功放，NAD cd机及Wii。壁炉两边的是一对Monitor Audio GS10 书架音箱。 <br/><br/>题外话，这样重新摆放音箱后感觉音质有提高，估计跟以前音箱与两个大窗户垂直有关。现在窗户在音箱背面，可能对声音的干扰减少了。<br/><br/>* 打完收工 *]]></description>
		</item>
		
			<item>
			<link>http://www.bluestrait.com/blog/article.asp?id=292</link>
			<title><![CDATA[车房的储物架]]></title>
			<author>bluestrait@gmail.com(黄敏)</author>
			<category><![CDATA[DIY]]></category>
			<pubDate>Mon,08 Feb 2010 16:20:34 +0800</pubDate>
			<guid>http://www.bluestrait.com/blog/default.asp?id=292</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[相信大多数家庭都同意这样的一个看法：房子再大，杂物更多。<br/><br/>这些年我们从2-bedroom的flat, 搬到1-bed room的apartment, 然后3-bedroom的unit, 最后4-bedroom的two-storey House。不管住在哪儿，都发现空间不够用。现在住的家已经有3车房加储藏室，却仍然沮丧地发现仍然不够用。各种车房用品，旅游用具，运动器材，童车玩具，乱七八糟的东西丢的车房里到处都是。只能挖掘潜力，往空中发展了。于是决定在一个车房靠底的砖墙上装一个架子来组织一下。<br/><br/>想法很简单。将活动支架的底座铁条固定在墙上，之后活动支架就可以自由安装在铁架上，然后在支架上安放木板就完了。固定在墙上的优点是不占地面。同时选用活动支架以便于灵活调整每层架子之间的高度。<br/><br/><strong>所需工具</strong><br/>很简单：<br/>1. 电钻，水泥钻头 (masonry drill bit)<br/>2. 卷尺，水平仪<br/>3. 扳手，榔头<br/><img src="http://www.bluestrait.com/bluegallery/pictures/2010_02_garage_shelf/IMG_2559.jpg" border="0" alt=""/><br/><br/>空墙 （3.8米宽，2.4米高）<br/><img src="http://www.bluestrait.com/bluegallery/pictures/2010_02_garage_shelf/IMG_2547.jpg" border="0" alt=""/><br/><br/>材料：木板 19 * 190 * 1800mm, 铁架和配套的支架<br/><img src="http://www.bluestrait.com/bluegallery/pictures/2010_02_garage_shelf/IMG_2543.jpg" border="0" alt=""/><br/><br/>固定方式选择了dynabolt （膨胀螺栓？)。选择它而不是其他固定方式的原因是追求最高的承重系数。这个6×60mm的螺栓单个最高可承重70公斤。<br/><img src="http://www.bluestrait.com/bluegallery/pictures/2010_02_garage_shelf/IMG_2545.jpg" border="0" alt=""/><br/><br/>有关膨胀螺栓的使用，请参看<a target="_blank" href="http://bluestrait.com/blog/article.asp?id=296" rel="external">http://bluestrait.com/blog/article.asp?id=296</a>。<br/><br/>使用dynabolt固定在墙上的一根木条<br/><img src="http://www.bluestrait.com/bluegallery/pictures/2010_02_garage_shelf/IMG_2549.jpg" border="0" alt=""/><br/><br/>dynabolt固定特写<br/><img src="http://www.bluestrait.com/bluegallery/pictures/2010_02_garage_shelf/IMG_2551.jpg" border="0" alt=""/><br/><br/><strong>初步完工的支架</strong><br/><img src="http://www.bluestrait.com/bluegallery/pictures/2010_02_garage_shelf/IMG_2563.jpg" border="0" alt=""/><br/><br/><img src="http://www.bluestrait.com/bluegallery/pictures/2010_02_garage_shelf/IMG_2565.jpg" border="0" alt=""/>]]></description>
		</item>
		
			<item>
			<link>http://www.bluestrait.com/blog/article.asp?id=280</link>
			<title><![CDATA[[zt] TV antenna installation - 2]]></title>
			<author>bluestrait@gmail.com(黄敏)</author>
			<category><![CDATA[DIY]]></category>
			<pubDate>Thu,10 Dec 2009 18:51:33 +0800</pubDate>
			<guid>http://www.bluestrait.com/blog/default.asp?id=280</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[<p><big><b>Tools</b></big></p>
<p>The majority of the tools and equipment you will need for most installations are apparent. The following is a list of useful tools and miscellaneous materials that might also come in handy.</p>
<p>1. A complete set of nut drivers (spin-tights).</p>
<p>2. A set of ratchets and sockets.</p>
<p>3. A pocket compass, for orienting the antenna and setting up the rotor when the compass bearing(s) of the transmitter tower(s) is known.</p>
<p>4. A drill brace with a wide assortment of bits.</p>
<p>5. A good quality leather tool belt.</p>
<p>6. A crimping tool for fastening coaxial connectors.</p>
<p>7. Caulking compound for sealing the holes where transmission line enters the house.</p>
<p>8. Roofing tar (plastic roof cement), for sealing around screws on the roof.</p>
<p>9. Silicone grease for waterproofing coaxial cable connectors.</p>
<p>10. A sledge hammer for driving in ground rods.</p>
<p>11. A level or plumb bob for ensuring that the antenna mast is installed perpendicularly.</p>
<p>12. A map to aid antenna orientation. (Aircraft maps are ideal. Most airports sell them.)</p>
<p>13. A strong step ladder (in addition to extension ladders).</p>
<p>14. A magnetic stud finder.</p>
<p>15.A small, portable TV that operates on both standard house current (117 volts AC) and batteries.</p>
<p><big><b>Masts</b></big></p>
<p>Most antenna hardware catalogs list a wide variety of mounts and masts. Most however, are variations of a few basic types. By taking into account signal strength and ease of installation, it's not difficult deciding which site, mount, and hardware to use.</p>
<p>A mast (Figure 4-1) is used in every installation. The mast is the vertical tubing that supports the antenna. Conventional masts are available in 5 and 10 foot lengths. Telescoping mast units (Figure 4-2) are available in 20, 30, 40 and 50 foot lengths. Each type is available in various wall thicknesses that provide different degrees of strength and rigidity. Your choice will depend on the height, weight, and size of the antenna being installed and also on wind conditions in the area.</p>
<p>Both conventional and telescoping masts are available in galvanized steel and in high Tensile, acrylic-coated steel. Acrylic-coated masts are preferable because of their greater strength and durability.</p>
<p><big><b>MOUNTING SITES AND RELATED PROCEDURES</b></big></p>
<p><b>Attic Installations</b></p>
<p>An attic installation (Figure 4-3) may work in areas where strong signals are present. In most cases, an attic installation is the easiest, fastest, most economical, and most convenient installation. There are a few conditions however that can prohibit an attic installation. Shallow attics that are obstructed by rafter supports may not accommodate the size antenna required for the installation. Most attics are not large enough to accommodate multi-antenna arrays and rotors. Also, aluminum foil on insulation, aluminum or steel siding, metal gutters at the attic level, and metal lath under older plaster walls all can interfere to some degree with reception.</p>
<p><img height="214" width="227" alt="TV ANTENNA IN ATTIC INSTALL" src="http://www.starkelectronic.com/cmfig4-3.gif" /> Fig. 4-3. A typical attic installatIon.</p>
<p>To determine if an attic installation is suitable, take a test antenna, a field-strength meter and a portable TV up into the attic and check the signal level and picture quality. If the signal level is sufficient and there is room enough to properly orient the antenna, assemble the antenna in the attic and attach one end of the transmission line to the antenna terminals. Then prepare the mount for the antenna.</p>
<p>Several roof Type mounting brackets (Figure 4-4) and swivel mounts (Figure 4-5) are adaptable for use in attic installations. The mounting bracket is used to attach the short mast to a rafter or rafter support. The antenna is then mounted on the other end of the mast. The antenna however, must not touch the attic floor. Also, remember that the antenna should be attached to the mast right side up, even though the installation appears to be the reverse of an outside installation.</p>
<p><img height="129" width="320" alt="EXAMPLES OF MOUNTS USED FOR ATTIC INSTALLATIONS" src="http://www.starkelectronic.com/cmfig4-4.gif" /> Fig. 4-4. Fig. 4-5.</p>
<p>Examples of swivel mounts that can be used in attic installations.</p>
<p>An alternative method of mounting the mast is the flatten one end of the mast with a hammer and drill a hole in it through which a nail, screw, or bolt can be inserted for securing the mast to a rafter or rafter support. However, this method requires more time and effort than does the bracket method.</p>
<p>Instead of using a mast, you may suspend the antenna from the inside of the roof with guy wires or nylon rope. But don't let the guy wires touch the antenna elements. They will short out the antenna.</p>
<p>Once you have the antenna mounted or suspended, you are ready to run the transmission line. If at all &nbsp; possible, keep it indoors. Coaxial cable (Figure 4-6) is&nbsp; the best transmission line for any antenna installation. It should be used instead of twinlead even in attic installations. Selection and installation of the correct transmission line is described in the chapter beginning on page 15.</p>
<p><img height="203" width="325" alt="Coax wire" src="http://www.starkelectronic.com/cmfig4-6.gif" /> Fig. 4-6. CoaxIal cable, the preferred type of TV transmission line.</p>
<p>After you have run the transmission line, use a compass and field-strength meter to orient the antenna toward the signal source(s). Check the picture and sound on all channels before you tighten down the clamp that secures the antenna to the mast.</p>
<p>Some manufacturers make special antennas for attic installations. These antennas however, tend to be omni~directional. This means they intercept signals equally well from all directions. Consequently, they will also pick up interference more readily than a good directional antenna.</p>
<p><big>Chimney Mounts</big></p>
<p>Chimney Mounts (Figure 4~7) are used more frequently than other types of mounts, but they often are not the best option. Although they are relatively easy to install, the smoke and gases from a chimney can shorten the life of the antenna and significantly impair its performance.</p>
<p>A chimney installation is practical only if the chimney is sturdy and vertical. Never mount an antenna on a deteriorated chimney. During moderate too high winds an unguyed mast taller than 10 feet can exert enough leverage to break off an unstable chimney.</p>
<p>If you choose a chimney mount, use enough mast to place the antenna above most of the smoke and gases. However, to avoid overstressing the chimney, &nbsp;do not mount the antenna more than 10 feet above the top of the chimney. If the height of the antenna must exceed 10' to receive satisfactory signals, the mast must be properly guyed. CYhe correct method of &nbsp;installing guy wires is described in Chapter 7.)</p>
<p><img height="242" width="349" src="http://www.starkelectronic.com/cmfg4-7.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>Securing the chimney~mounted antenna and minimizing the stress on the chimney requires the mounting straps to be properly spaced. The top strap should be placed as high up on the chimney as possible. If the chimney has a crown or projecting cap, place the to strap directly under it. The bottom strap should be placed 4 feet below the top strap. If the chimney isn't long enough to permit this, place the bottom strap as far down on the chimney as possible. If the mast must be 10 feet above the chimney top, don't use a chimney mount unless you can space the straps at least 30 inches apart. For masts less than 10 feet above the chimney top, the straps should be spaced no less than 24 inches apart.</p>
<p>Be sure the straps are level, with no kinks or twists. The easiest way to level straps is to line them up along the nearest course of bricks. Straps should be centered on the bricks-not over the mortar joint. Pull each strap tight, line it up so that it's level, and then tighten it just enough to hold it in place.</p>
<p>Before the straps are tightened completely, fasten the mast to the mounting bracket. (1t is assumed that the antenna has already been clamped securely to the mast, and one end of the transmission line has been connected to the antenna terminals.) Align the mast so that it is vertical. Then completely tighten the mounting straps. Next, orient the antenna. Finally, tighten the clamps that hold the mast to the mounting. Be sure the clamps are tight enough to prevent the mast from being rotated by the wind load on the antenna.</p>
<p><big>Roof Mounts</big></p>
<p>There are two basic types of roof mounts: a base mount (Figure 4-8) and a tripod (Figure 4-9). Tripods are stronger and more rigid than base mounts, but they are also more expensive. When given a choice, use a tripod.</p>
<p>10 TOOLS, MASTS &amp; HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS</p>
<p>However, if cost savings or limited space require it, a properly guyed base mount will usually work. Unlike a chimney mount, a base mount holds the mast at only one point, the bottom. Consequently, the mast also must be supported by guy wires, regardless of the mast length.</p>
<p>Correct installation of either type of roof mount requires great care and should not be attempted without a helper. Both types of mounts should be secured to the roof with either bolts or lag screws. These should be screwed into only solid wood like a rafter or a truss section. You can locate these with a stud finder.</p>
<p>If you must fasten the mount to the roof in an area where a bolt or screw cannot reach a rafter, send your assistant into the attic with a large square of wood 1-1/2&quot; thick, to act as a backing plate. Have him hold this wood against the entry points of the screws or bolts so that the mount is firmly anchored in both the roof sheathing and the wooden block. This will give the mount needed stability.</p>
<p>When installing a base mount, attach the base plate to the roof in the manner lust described, and place the mast (with antenna, guy ring, and guy wires attached), into the U-bolt that has been fastened loosely to the mount. Do not let the bottom of the mast touch the roof; it may tear a hole in the shingles.</p>
<p><img height="356" align="Left" width="333" src="http://www.starkelectronic.com/cmfg4-10.gif" alt="" />Since a base mount must be guyed, an easy way to raise the mast is to first fasten one of the guy wire screw eyes to the roof peak on the end of the roof opposite the direction in which the antenna is lying. Run the end of the guy wire through the screw eye. Have your assistant slowly raise the mast while you pull the guy wire through the screw eye (figure 4-10). When the mast is vertical, the guy wire you are holding will be approximately the right length for permanent installation. Temporarily secure this guy wire. Install the other guy wires while your helper holds the mast in a vertical position. Check the mast with a level as you tighten and permanently secure each wire. When the mast is vertical and each guy wire has been tightened, orient the antenna and firmly tighten the U-bolt (clamp) on the base mount.</p>
<p>Tripods, as noted earlier, are a stronger, more rigid type of roof mount. The most common tripod mounts are 3, 5, and 10 feet high. The 3 foot tripod is most commonly used. A tripod mount can be installed and leveled before the mast is inserted. It should always be mounted so that the antenna can be folded down along the peak of the roof. This will enable you to lower it more easily should repairs or adjustments become necessary in the future. Even though tripods are very stable, any tripod-mounted mast over 10 feet high should be guyed</p>
<p><img height="204" align="Left" width="166" src="http://www.starkelectronic.com/cmfg4-11.gif" alt="" />Ensure the sturdiness of the tripod by anchoring. To protect the roof, use a pitch pad seal under each tripod leg (Figure 4-11). Coat all lag bolts with roofing tar or other sealant to prevent leaks around them. Roofing tar or silicone should be used liberally around all holes, bolts, screws, nails, and eye screws.</p>
<p>&nbsp;</p>
<p>&nbsp;</p>
<p>&nbsp;</p>
<p><big><b>Wall Mounts</b></big></p>
<p><img height="164" align="Left" width="242" alt="wall mount" src="http://www.starkelectronic.com/cmfg4-12.gif" />Many types of wall mount brackets are available. However, many of them are poorly made and will not withstand more than a moderate wind. Buy only the best quality wall mount brackets (Figure 4-12).</p>
<p>When installing a wall mount, space the brackets as far apart as possible (or practical). Generally, the farther apart you space the brackets, the stronger the installation will be. Be sure the brackets extend out from the wall far enough for the mast to clear the roof eaves. As with roof mounts, screw wall mount brackets only into solid wood, and use caulking or other durable sealant around screws.</p>
<p><big><b>Mounting from the Ground</b></big></p>
<p><img height="367" align="Left" width="195" src="http://www.starkelectronic.com/cmfg4-13.gif" alt="" />Many times you will not want (or will not be able) to mount an antenna on the roof. One of the best alternatives to roof mounting is mounting from the ground (Figure 4-13). With a firm base support and one or more wall mount brackets, a ground mount installation is exceptionally sturdy and long lasting. A good ground mount may also eliminate the need of guy wires.</p>
<p>Correctly preparing the base of a ground mount is very important. The antenna mast should rest on something more solid and stable than just hare earth. If your installation site is on a solid deck or patio, the base is already prepared for you.</p>
<p>When you have to prepare the base yourself, dig a hold about 2 feet deep at the spot where the mast will contact the ground. Remember that the base hole must line up with the wall bracket(s) so that the mast will be vertical. A plumb line and bob suspended from the roof eave can be used to determine the correct positions of the base hole and wall brackets (Figure4-13). Use bricks or flat stones in the bottom of the hole as a footing to prevent the base of the mast from moving. Concrete can also be used as a footing but you'll have to wait for it to dry before you can put up the mast.</p>
<p>Once the base is prepared, mount a wall bracket at least 10 feet above the ground or as high as possible. Remember, the farther apart the wall brackets are placed, the sturdier the installation (figure 4-13). If there is 5 feet or more left between the first wall bracket and the roof eave, add another wall bracket. Be sure the base hole and the wall brackets line up so that the mast will be vertical. This can be determined easily by suspending a plumb bob and line from the roof eave into the base hole. Also remember that the wall bracket(s) must extend out from the wall far enough so that the mast clears the roof eaves. Be sure the screws of each wall bracket are anchored in solid wood. Screw them into the wall studs.</p>
<p>Firmly clamp the antenna to the upper end of the mast. Insert the mast into the base hole or rest it on the deck or patio. Vertically position the mast by &quot;walking&quot; it up hand over hand. Rest it against the wall bracket(s). Loosely fasten the mast to the wall bracket(s). After determining that the mast is truly perpendicular, tighten the bracket(s) a little more. Next, orient the antenna. After the antenna has been oriented, securely tighten the wall bracket clamps around the mast. Finally, if a base hole is being used, fill in the hole and firmly tamp the soil around the base of the mast.</p>
<p><img height="430" align="Left" width="98" src="http://www.starkelectronic.com/cmfg4-14.gif" alt="" /><big><b>Telescoping Masts</b></big></p>
<p>A telescoping mast (Figure 4-14) is used in installations for which standard 5 or 10 foot lengths of mast stacked together would not be sufficiently strong or rigid. A length of telescoping mast is stronger and more rigid than the same lengths made up of standard mast pieces stacked together. Because of their additional strength, some telescoping masts used with ground mounts can be extended up to 15 feet above the roof line without requiring guy wires. Another advantage of telescoping masts is that they can be easily adjusted to odd heights without having to cut the tubing.</p>
<p>Because telescoping masts are heavy and require firm bottom support, they should not be used with chimney or wall mounts. However, because ground and roof mounts do provide bottom support, telescoping masts can be used with these mounts to provide additional height.</p>
<p>For extra strength when installing large antennas, use a telescoping mast that is one size larger than actually needed. This will permit you to attach the antenna to the mast section immediately below the topmost one. This section is larger and stronger than the topmost section because it is reinforced by the 1-1/4&quot; diameter section that remains inside.</p>
<p>When installing telescoping masts 20 feet or shorter in length, lay the mast on the ground and extend it to the desired length. Prop up the small end on a stable support and attach the antenna and transmission line. Then connect the bottom of the mast to the base mount and walk up the mast to its vertical position. (Use a base mount that will swivel!)</p>
<p>For masts over 20 feet long, securely mount and guy the bottom section first. Then attach guy rings and wires to the rest of the sections. Mount the antenna on the upper section, secure its guy ring and the transmission line. Using a person to hold the guy wires to each anchor point, raise each section one at a time, starting with the top. Tighten the wires after the mast is fully extended.</p>
<p><img height="417" width="582" src="http://www.starkelectronic.com/cmfg4-15.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p><big><b>Vent Pipe Mounting</b></big></p>
<p><img height="250" align="Left" width="290" src="http://www.starkelectronic.com/cmfg4-16.gif" alt="" />Vent pipe mounting (Figure 4-16) secures the antenna and mast to the plumbing (gas) vent that comes up through the roof of the house. This type of mounting should be used only for the smallest antennas, and then only when economy absolutely demands it. Vent pipe mounts are not sturdy enough for medium and large antennas. Even a moderate wind or ice load may ruin the installation and damage your customer's property.</p>
<p>Standard vent pipe mounting hardware is available. However, it should be used with great care. Most vent pipes are made of soft materials like copper or orangeburg, which are easily crushed or dented by the stress exerted by the mounting bracket.</p>
<p><big><b>Towers</b></big></p>
<p><img height="614" align="Left" width="203" src="http://www.starkelectronic.com/cmfg4-17.gif" alt="" />Antennas are mounted on towers (Figure 4-17) when exceptional height (35 feet or more) is required for adequate reception or when an unusually large antenna array must be used. Although they are very sturdy installations if properly installed, towers can be very difficult and dangerous to erect. Tower manufacturers' instructions and specifications usually include a large number of warnings and precautions that must be strictly followed. The best advice that can be given about tower installations before attempting one of your own, is to work with an experienced tower installer on one or more installations. If possible, have an experienced installer assist you with your first tower installation. If you do find yourself involved in a tower installation, be prepared for some heavy work and for the possibility of having to climb well above the height of the average roof.</p>
<p>If you must climb a tower, use an attachable work platform with a safety ring and safety belt. These are available from some tower manufactures. CAUTION: Before climbing any tower, first check the condition of the structure and the guy wires to make sure the installation is safe. Even a newly installed tower may have defects that make it dangerous to climb.</p>
<p>In most cases, a properly guyed 40 or 50 foot telescoping mast can be substituted for a 40 to 50 foot tower installation. It is not only easier and less dangerous to install, it is also significantly less expensive. A detailed discussion about the various types of towers and the procedures for installing each of them would require more space than is available in this manual. The most accurate and helpful sources for such information is the extremely detailed instructions that most tower manufacturers provide with their towers.</p>]]></description>
		</item>
		
			<item>
			<link>http://www.bluestrait.com/blog/article.asp?id=279</link>
			<title><![CDATA[[zt] Install a TV Antenna]]></title>
			<author>bluestrait@gmail.com(黄敏)</author>
			<category><![CDATA[DIY]]></category>
			<pubDate>Thu,10 Dec 2009 18:29:54 +0800</pubDate>
			<guid>http://www.bluestrait.com/blog/default.asp?id=279</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[<p><font class="copy"><b>Before You Begin</b></font>           <br />
<font class="copy"> Reconsider installing an antenna yourself. Be advised it's dangerous working on a roof especially near power lines. This project is best left to a professional antenna service. </font>           <br />
<br />
<font class="copy"><b>Step-by-Step Instructions</b></font>           <br />
<font class="copy">    </font>           <br />
<br />
<font class="copy">          <b>Step 1:  Read the manual </b>          <br />
Carefully read the installation manual that came with the antenna and make sure you have all the hardware required.               </font>          <br clear="all" />
<br />
<font class="copy">          <b>Step 2:   Assemble the antenna </b>          <br />
Piece and fasten together the components of the two main boom sections moving any elements out of the way to connect cross over wires. Then loosely attach one of the mast clamp assemblies to the main boom. Attach the other mast clamp assembly to the cradle boom. It should face the same direction as the boom's mast assembly. Unfold the two sets of metal support straps on the cradle boom and attach them to the main boom. Press the end plugs into the main boom and cradle boom. Then pull the UHF bowtie's two halves away from the main boom until they lock into place. Slide each half's unattached end over one of the antenna's lead-in terminals (one for each half of the UHF bowtie on each side of the boom). </font>          <br clear="all" />
<br />
<font class="copy">          <b>Step 3:  Connect the lead-in cable to the antenna</b>          <br />
Thread the transformer's spade terminals through the antenna's strain-relief tab. Slide the spade terminals around the antenna's lead-in terminals on both sides of the boom. Then secure them with fastening hardware. Screw the F-connector onto the matching transformer and slip the weather boot over the connection. </font>          <br clear="all" />
<br />
<font class="copy">          <b>Step 4:  Unfold the antenna</b>          <br />
Hold the main boom's elements near the pivot points and pull them away from the boom until they snap into the self-locking plastic-support insulators. Hold each wing boom and turn its elements until they snap squarely in place and press the plugs into the wing booms. Bolt the wing boom brackets onto the main boom with fastening hardware. And insert the top and bottom wing booms into the brackets and secure them with fasteners. </font>          <br clear="all" />
<br />
<font class="copy">          <b>Step 5:  Install the antenna mount</b>          <br />
<img hspace="0" height="141" border="1" align="left" width="130" vspace="5" src="http://www.diyornot.com/imagebin/s012-05a.gif" alt="" /> <img hspace="0" height="141" border="0" align="left" width="10" vspace="5" src="http://www.diyornot.com/sysimagebin/pixel.gif" alt="" /> <img hspace="0" height="120" border="1" align="right" width="130" vspace="5" src="http://www.diyornot.com/imagebin/s012-05d.gif" alt="" /> <img hspace="0" height="120" border="0" align="right" width="10" vspace="5" src="http://www.diyornot.com/sysimagebin/pixel.gif" alt="" /> Antenna mounts attach to the roof, chimney or side of the house. Follow the manufacturer's installation directions. If you use a roof mount cover the mounting screws with roofing cement to assure that there are no leaks. <br />
<br />
<img hspace="0" height="130" border="1" align="left" width="93" vspace="5" src="http://www.diyornot.com/imagebin/s012-05b.gif" alt="" /> <img hspace="0" height="130" border="0" align="left" width="10" vspace="5" src="http://www.diyornot.com/sysimagebin/pixel.gif" alt="" /> <img hspace="0" height="130" border="1" align="right" width="106" vspace="5" src="http://www.diyornot.com/imagebin/s012-05c.gif" alt="" /> <img hspace="0" height="130" border="0" align="right" width="10" vspace="5" src="http://www.diyornot.com/sysimagebin/pixel.gif" alt="" /> To mount the antenna on a chimney it must be in good condition and at least a couple of feet above the peak of the roof. Mounts that attach to the side of the house should be attached with screws long enough to go through the siding into the underlayment or wall studs. </font>          <br clear="all" />
<br />
<font class="copy">          <b>Step 6:  Attach to the mast</b>          <br />
<img hspace="0" height="184" border="1" align="left" width="294" vspace="5" src="http://www.diyornot.com/imagebin/s012-06.gif" alt="" /> <img hspace="0" height="184" border="0" align="left" width="10" vspace="5" src="http://www.diyornot.com/sysimagebin/pixel.gif" alt="" /> Get help from someone who can hold the antenna on a ladder while you slide the antenna mast clamp assembly over the end of the mast and tighten to hold the antenna in place. Be careful not to let the crossover wires touch the antenna boom, mast or each other. </font>          <br clear="all" />
<br />
<font class="copy">          <b>Step 7:  Ground the antenna</b>          <br />
<img hspace="0" height="192" border="1" align="left" width="192" vspace="5" src="http://www.diyornot.com/imagebin/s012-07.gif" alt="" /> <img hspace="0" height="192" border="0" align="left" width="10" vspace="5" src="http://www.diyornot.com/sysimagebin/pixel.gif" alt="" /> The antenna and mount must be grounded. Aluminum grounding wire is available where you purchased the antenna. Purchase enough to lead from the antenna to the ground. This wire is clamped to the antenna mast at the top and to a ground rod driven into the earth at ground level. Carefully follow the grounding instructions that come with the antenna. <br />
<br />
Lead the coax from the antenna to the location where you want it to enter the house. Install a 75-ohm grounding block on the siding and attach the end of the coax to the block. Drill a hole through the wall being careful not to hit wires or pipes that may be inside it. Run the second piece of coax through the wall and attach the end to the grounding block. Use a piece of grounding wire to attach the grounding block to the ground rod. </font>          <br clear="all" />
<br />
<font class="copy">          <b>Step 8:  Attach the antenna to the TV</b>          <br />
<img hspace="0" height="130" border="1" align="left" width="145" vspace="5" src="http://www.diyornot.com/imagebin/s012-08a.gif" alt="" /> <img hspace="0" height="130" border="0" align="left" width="10" vspace="5" src="http://www.diyornot.com/sysimagebin/pixel.gif" alt="" /> <img hspace="0" height="126" border="1" align="right" width="130" vspace="5" src="http://www.diyornot.com/imagebin/s012-08b.gif" alt="" /> <img hspace="0" height="126" border="0" align="right" width="10" vspace="5" src="http://www.diyornot.com/sysimagebin/pixel.gif" alt="" /> You may have to purchase a splitter if you want to use the TV antenna as an antenna for the FM radio. The illustrations show several possible combinations. <img hspace="0" height="133" border="1" align="left" width="130" vspace="5" src="http://www.diyornot.com/imagebin/s012-08c.gif" alt="" /> <img hspace="0" height="133" border="0" align="left" width="10" vspace="5" src="http://www.diyornot.com/sysimagebin/pixel.gif" alt="" /> <img hspace="0" height="134" border="1" align="right" width="130" vspace="5" src="http://www.diyornot.com/imagebin/s012-08d.gif" alt="" /> <img hspace="0" height="134" border="0" align="right" width="10" vspace="5" src="http://www.diyornot.com/sysimagebin/pixel.gif" alt="" /> <br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<i>Illustrations courtesy of Radio Shack</i>          </font></p>]]></description>
		</item>
		
			<item>
			<link>http://www.bluestrait.com/blog/article.asp?id=277</link>
			<title><![CDATA[修理拉门: 换滚轮]]></title>
			<author>bluestrait@gmail.com(黄敏)</author>
			<category><![CDATA[DIY]]></category>
			<pubDate>Thu,03 Dec 2009 17:30:50 +0800</pubDate>
			<guid>http://www.bluestrait.com/blog/default.asp?id=277</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[餐厅到阳台的滑门已经工作不正常很久了。问题表现为滑动困难，推动时费劲，发出很大噪音，地上的滑槽磨损严重。怀疑是滑轮坏了。不过一直到今天才终于下决心修理。<br/><br/>抬起滑门，然后从框架中拉出来。滑门全景<br/><img src="http://www.bluestrait.com/bluegallery/pictures/2009_11_20_DIY/IMG_1749.jpg" border="0" alt=""/><br/><br/>两个滚轮就安装在门框下部的铝合金槽里。拆开了才能取出嵌在里面的滚轮：<br/><img src="http://www.bluestrait.com/bluegallery/pictures/2009_11_20_DIY/IMG_1748.jpg" border="0" alt=""/><br/><br/>拆下的滚轮，bunnings买回来的替换件（不便宜 $40)，和家居超级万金油-WD40：<br/><img src="http://www.bluestrait.com/bluegallery/pictures/2009_11_20_DIY/IMG_1747.jpg" border="0" alt=""/><br/>可以看到两个滚轮还不一样。不出所料，左边的滑轮的塑料轮廓已经完全不见了，这就是故障的根本原因。<br/><br/>用刷子，turpentine清洁完滑轮槽，门框后将滚轮装回去，装好固定螺丝和调节螺丝。使用调节螺丝调整悬挂高度，然后给滑轮、滑槽喷上wd40，最后把门装回，打完收工。<br/><br/><a target="_blank" href="http://www.bluestrait.com/blog/article.asp?id=272" rel="external">研究资料</a><br/>]]></description>
		</item>
		
			<item>
			<link>http://www.bluestrait.com/blog/article.asp?id=273</link>
			<title><![CDATA[繁忙的周末：装屋顶排气扇，修水龙头，换纱窗，换拉门的滚轮]]></title>
			<author>bluestrait@gmail.com(黄敏)</author>
			<category><![CDATA[DIY]]></category>
			<pubDate>Fri,20 Nov 2009 17:02:31 +0800</pubDate>
			<guid>http://www.bluestrait.com/blog/default.asp?id=273</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[夏天来了，家里的中央空调愈显老态了。为了让它可以工作的轻松一点，11/16请人来在屋顶上装了新的insulation, 赶上了政府的$1,600 rebate的末班车。感觉效果还是挺明显。另外在做了一番<a target="_blank" href="http://www.bluestrait.com/blog/article.asp?id=271" rel="external">研究</a>后决定一鼓作气，再在屋顶上安装两个排气扇(Attic Vent)。这个排气扇的作用的大小似乎颇多争论，有人认为科学研究表明对温度改善毫无意义，有人认为效果不容置疑。不过，这个成本低廉，装了总是没有坏处的，所以决定还是装了算了。<br/><br/>于是周五晚上跑到bunnings一气买了下列东西，准备周末做完：<br/><br/><strong>给vent</strong><br/>1. <a target="_blank" href="http://www.edmonds.com.au/html/products/windmaster_turbine_ventilator_300mm.htm" rel="external">Edmond Windmaster Turbine Ventilator</a> x 2&nbsp;&nbsp;$ 200<br/>这个是铝制的。Bunnings有更便宜的是$56一个，似乎是用塑料制造的，鉴于铝比塑料可靠的“偏见”，和不求最好，但求最贵的生活态度，选择了贵一倍的。:-)<br/><br/>2. Roof and Gutter silicone sealant $6<br/><img src="http://www2.blackwoods.com.au/infoBANK/ProductImg/Selleys%20Roof%20&amp;%20Gutter.jpg " border="0" alt=""/><br/><br/><strong>给纱门</strong><br/>3. 1.2m ｘ　2.05m Alumium flyscreen mesh roll $29<br/>4. spline roller $5<br/><br/><strong>水龙头</strong><br/>5. teflon tape $2 <br/><img src="http://www.drsfostersmith.com/images/Categoryimages/normal/p_925224_20774D.jpg" border="0" alt=""/><br/><br/>周六早上天公作美，阴沉沉的却没下雨，凉快，正是上房揭瓦的 好天气。开始装attic vent吧。<br/><br/><strong>工具</strong><br/>螺丝刀<br/><img src="http://www.bluestrait.com/bluegallery/pictures/2009_08_04_workshop/img_0730_m.jpg" border="0" alt=""/><br/><br/>caulking gun <br/><img src="http://www.bunburypaintcentre.com.au/Photos/185_Skeleton-Caulking-Gun.jpg" border="0" alt=""/><br/><br/>水平仪<br/><img src="http://chinamanufacturers.supplierlist.com/risun/productsimages/SpiritLevel_7000.jpg" border="0" alt=""/><br/><br/>螺丝钉40mm 8G x2<br/><br/><strong>工序很简单</strong><br/>1.&#160;&#160;&#160;&#160;选择合适的位置。<br/>1.1&#160;&#160;&#160;&#160;按照安装说明书，建议选择屋顶线下来第三排，因为再往上可能会伤及屋顶线的结构。<br/>1.2&#160;&#160;&#160;&#160;因为这个vent是靠自然风推动的，因此要尽量选择开阔的位置，比如能够三面受风的地点。<br/><br/>2.&#160;&#160;&#160;&#160;去掉一片瓦。我发现很多房子的布瓦方式是每辆片固定一片。也就是说每隔一片就将一片瓦用铁丝固定在瓦下的支撑横梁上。所以如果发现一片瓦拆不下来，那多半是因为固定住了，换隔壁那块就行了。因为上下两排瓦之间是钩住的，所以要将上面一排瓦抬起来才可 一抽出下排的瓦。<br/><br/>3.&#160;&#160;&#160;&#160;将flashing（底座？）的上端插入上排的瓦下面，压好，用手尽力将瓦下的flashing部分向上卷起，以尽可能地形成一个倒钩结构以加强稳定性。再将提供的固定用金属条弯好形状，一头勾住flashing，另一头或用铁钉或用螺丝固定在瓦下的横梁上。这个铁钉或螺丝都要自己提供，没有附带。<br/><br/>4.&#160;&#160;&#160;&#160;安装&#34;Vari-Pitch&#34; throat（瓶颈？）。这个瓶颈的顶端需要调整到四个方向上都水平以保证最大效率。你可能需要一个简易的气泡水平仪来帮助调整。为此Vari-Pitch由上下两个可活动的部分组成，通过组合两个部分的不同旋转位置，可以达到最后水平的目标。这个阶段可能需要一点时间和耐心。完全水平后就可将用于锁死上下两部分的一个金属扣用螺丝固定住。这个螺丝也要自己提供。最后再使用提供的螺丝将整个vari-pitch固定在flashing上。<br/><br/>5.&#160;&#160;&#160;&#160;然后用caulking gun 装上roof and gutter silicone sealant 将vari-pitch的活动的上下两部分之间的分割线从内部封起来，以防止漏水。<br/><br/>6.&#160;&#160;&#160;&#160;然后就可以扣上风扇部分（洋葱头？），然后用提供的螺丝将其固定在vari-pitch上。<br/><br/>7.&#160;&#160;&#160;&#160;如果需要的话，再用sealant将螺丝的接口处密封好。注意，varipitch和flashing的结合不可以封住，因为它是特地设计成这样以便排水的。<br/><br/>8.&#160;&#160;&#160;&#160;欣赏成果吧:<br/><img src="http://www.bluestrait.com/bluegallery/pictures/2009_11_20_DIY/IMG_1745.jpg" border="0" alt=""/><br/><br/><img src="http://www.bluestrait.com/bluegallery/pictures/2009_11_20_DIY/IMG_1744.jpg" border="0" alt=""/><br/><br/>站在狂转中的vent边，可以明显感觉排出的空气比周边热不少，绝非心理作用。:-)<br/><img src="http://www.bluestrait.com/bluegallery/pictures/2009_11_20_DIY/IMG_1742.jpg" border="0" alt=""/><br/><br/><strong>耗时</strong><br/>安装了两个vent，第一个费点劲，第二个就熟手熟路了，总共实际时间不超过一个半小时。<br/><br/><a target="_blank" href="http://www.bluestrait.com/blog/article.asp?id=277" rel="external">修理拉门</a><br/>至于纱窗，更是简单，按照<a target="_blank" href="http://www.bluestrait.com/blog/article.asp?id=270" rel="external">这篇文章</a>的指导搞定了。<br/><br/><br/><br/>]]></description>
		</item>
		
			<item>
			<link>http://www.bluestrait.com/blog/article.asp?id=272</link>
			<title><![CDATA[How to Replace the Rollers on your Patio Door]]></title>
			<author>bluestrait@gmail.com(黄敏)</author>
			<category><![CDATA[DIY]]></category>
			<pubDate>Fri,20 Nov 2009 16:52:34 +0800</pubDate>
			<guid>http://www.bluestrait.com/blog/default.asp?id=272</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[<p>Every time we go out our sliding glass door and hear that grinding under the rollers, and have to use excessive force to open it, we say to our selves, &quot;I'm gonna fix that one of these days&quot;! But then we realize, &quot;HOW&quot;? Well, it's really quite simple, but there are a few tricks; so let's get started.</p>
<p>&nbsp;</p>
<div class="Heading3a">Instructions</div>
<div class="thingsYouNeed">
<h4 class="Heading4a">Things You'll Need:</h4>
<ul class="BulletList">
    <li><span>Long shafted phillips screw driver,large tip.</span></li>
    <li><span>regular phillips screw driver</span></li>
    <li><span>WD-40 or equivalent.</span></li>
    <li><span>tooth picks</span></li>
    <li><span>paper towels</span></li>
    <li><span>old tooth brush</span></li>
    <li><span>metal dental pick</span></li>
    <li><a href="http://www.ehow.com/shop_pry-bar.html">pry bar</a></li>
</ul>
</div>
<ol id="intelliTxt">
    <li>
    <div class="stepBg">Step <span>1</span></div>
    <p>Removing the door panel: On a sunny day with mild temperatures, purpose to &quot;fix that sucker&quot;, and do it expediently. Sliding glass doors are heavy and awkward, so get some help to remove the panels if you need. Usually, the operable panel of a sliding glass door will come out on the inside of the structure. Sometimes there will be sag in the header above the unit, so it may be necessary to remove the fixed panel from the outside first. Take your small Phillips screw driver and find the roller adjustment holes at the bottom of the door. Insert the tool into the hole and engage the roller screw. Lower the door down as much as possible, by doing forward and back rollers. Now try to lift the door up and swing the bottom into the room to remove the door.</p>
    </li>
    <li>
    <div class="stepBg">Step <span>2</span></div>
    <span class="image"> 									    <a class="thickbox" href="http://i.ehow.com/images/GlobalPhoto/Articles/2197502/1000647_Full.jpg" title=""><img alt="Removing the old roller" src="http://i.ehow.com/images/GlobalPhoto/Articles/2197502/1000647_Thumb.jpg" /></a>
    <div style="width: 137px;" class="caption">Removing the old roller</div>
    </span>
    <p>Removing the rollers: Rest your door on it's edge, and locate the roller adjustment hole. JUST ABOVE that hole is another hole. This is the hole that has a frame/roller screw in it. You must completely remove this screw to remove the old roller.( Be careful not to separate the frame from the glass when doing this procedure)Use the large Phillips screw driver to remove this screw. Pry out the old roller. Secure the door.</p>
    </li>
    <li>
    <div class="stepBg">Step <span>3</span></div>
    <span class="image"> 									    <a class="thickbox" href="http://i.ehow.com/images/GlobalPhoto/Articles/2197502/1000638_Full.jpg" title=""><img alt="Like for Like" src="http://i.ehow.com/images/GlobalPhoto/Articles/2197502/1000638_Thumb.jpg" /></a>
    <div style="width: 76px;" class="caption">Like for Like</div>
    </span>
    <p>Go shopping: VERY IMPORTANT; TAKE THE OLD ROLLER TO THE HARDWARE STORE. You must get the identical roller. Examine the new roller and match it in every way to the old. Double check by getting a clerk. BUY TWO ROLLERS. Save money by NOT making a return trip.</p>
    </li>
    <li>
    <div class="stepBg">Step <span>4</span></div>
    <span class="image"> 									    <a class="thickbox" href="http://i.ehow.com/images/GlobalPhoto/Articles/2197502/1000648_Full.jpg" title=""><img alt="You must thouroughly clean the track" src="http://i.ehow.com/images/GlobalPhoto/Articles/2197502/1000648_Thumb.jpg" /></a>
    <div style="width: 223px;" class="caption">You must thouroughly clean the track</div>
    </span>
    <p>Installing new rollers: Insert the new roller in the frame you disassembled, and screw it back together. Flip the door over and do the other side. Put the door aside and prepare the sliding glass door frame track.</p>
    </li>
    <li>
    <div class="stepBg">Step <span>5</span></div>
    <span class="image"> 									    <a class="thickbox" href="http://i.ehow.com/images/GlobalPhoto/Articles/2197502/1000651_Full.jpg" title=""><img alt="You won't believe how much goock is in there!" src="http://i.ehow.com/images/GlobalPhoto/Articles/2197502/1000651_Thumb.jpg" /></a>
    <div style="width: 271px;" class="caption">You won't believe how much goock is in there!</div>
    </span>
    <p>Cleaning the track: Lay paper towels on your carpet to protect it. Vacuum and brush out the track all the way across. Now spray the roller track with the WD-40 and let it soak in. Wear safety glasses and use the tooth picks to gouge out all the dead bugs, leaves, dog hair, alligators, and rhinoceroses out of the track. And stay at it until you can see shiny aluminum at the very bottom of the crevice. Use toilet paper or more paper towels to mop up the sludge.</p>
    </li>
    <li>
    <div class="stepBg">Step <span>6</span></div>
    <p>Re-installing the door: Bring over your door and put it back in. First insert it in at the top, and then swing the bottom into place and down onto the track. Use the small Phillips screw driver to adjust the new rollers. Slide the door over to the closed position, but leave a 1/4&quot; gap top to bottom. Adjust the rollers so the gap is parallel to the frame vertically. Congratulations, your door slides very nicely now, and you can say, &quot;I did it myself&quot;! Thanks to Ken Swanson</p>
    </li>
    <li>
    <div class="stepBg">Step <span>7</span></div>
    <span class="image"> 									    <a class="thickbox" href="http://i.ehow.com/images/GlobalPhoto/Articles/2197502/1000641_Full.jpg" title=""><img alt="Removing the lock screws" src="http://i.ehow.com/images/GlobalPhoto/Articles/2197502/1000641_Thumb.jpg" /></a>
    <div style="width: 157px;" class="caption">Removing the lock screws</div>
    </span>
    <p>Optional Extraction: Sometimes lodged doors have to be removed from the outside. Even to the point of grinding off the screen guide. To do the panel extraction, remove the top and bottom fixed center screws on the fixed panel.(see picture)Pull the fixed panel out of the side frame, lift the panel up, and swing the bottom out and away, and take out the fixed panel. Now the operable panel will swing outside and be removed.</p>
    </li>
</ol>
<script type="text/javascript">
			jQuery('.article ol .image').each(function(i,e){
				var $this = jQuery(this);
	
				$this.find('img').error(function(){
					jQuery(this).remove();
					$this.remove();
				});
			});
		</script>
<div id="DMINSTR" type="adimpression" onclick="_JT.DM_Click(this)" name="&amp;adunit_id=ca-ehow_336x280&amp;ad_unit_type=CNT&amp;ad_unit_network=GAP&amp;revenue_basis=CPC&amp;ad_position=B&amp;revenue_tag=home_home_repair_maintenance">
<div class="Text SponsoredResults Section">&nbsp;</div>
</div>
<div class="resources tips">
<div class="sectionTitle Heading3a">Tips &amp; Warnings</div>
<ul>
    <li class="FLC">
    <div class="text">You can use a pry bar to elevate the door while adjusting the rollers, but be careful not to damage the frame, or track.</div>
    </li>
    <li class="FLC">
    <div class="text">Check to see if the little plastic guides at the top of the operable panel are missing. You can get 2 more of these at the store.</div>
    </li>
    <li class="FLC">
    <div class="text">This is a good time to look into security hardware for your SGD too.</div>
    </li>
    <li class="FLC">
    <div class="text">Protect your back. Get help</div>
    </li>
    <li class="FLC">
    <div class="text">Protect your eyes. Wear eye protection</div>
    </li>
    <li class="FLC">
    <div class="text">Don't leave the house without the old roller</div>
    </li>
    <li class="FLC">
    <div class="text">Don't leave the store with the wrong product</div>
    </li>
    <li class="FLC">
    <div class="text">Don't pull on the center of the vertical frame rails; you could dislodge the glass from the frame. Then you will have to take the side rail completely apart and re-install the rubber, then put it back together.</div>
    </li>
</ul>
</div>]]></description>
		</item>
		
			<item>
			<link>http://www.bluestrait.com/blog/article.asp?id=271</link>
			<title><![CDATA[How to Install an Attic Vent]]></title>
			<author>bluestrait@gmail.com(黄敏)</author>
			<category><![CDATA[DIY]]></category>
			<pubDate>Wed,18 Nov 2009 17:31:07 +0800</pubDate>
			<guid>http://www.bluestrait.com/blog/default.asp?id=271</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[<p><font size="3" font="">
<table border="0">
    <tbody>
        <tr>
            <td valign="top">
            <p>Good Video:&nbsp;</p>
            <p>roof vent:&nbsp; <a target="_blank" href="http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=CXWq49u3H3s">www.youtube.com/watch</a></p>
            <p>eave vent:&nbsp; <a href="http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=DTKD2Exkl4I&amp;feature=related" target="_blank">www.youtube.com/watch</a></p>
            <p><strong>VENTILATION BASICS</strong></p>
            <ul>
                <li><font size="2">Proper attic ventilation is an important part of a healthy home&ndash;both for the structure and its occupants. This document explains how attic ventilation protects a home from moisture and how to install vents that will keep your home in good condition.<br />
                <br />
                </font></li>
                <li><font size="2">There are a wide variety of sources of moisture in a home, from the building materials themselves to normal everyday activities. Cooking, bathing and washing clothes all release gallons of water vapor into the air, for example.<br />
                <br />
                </font></li>
                <li><font size="2">That vapor isn't a problem inside the average home because the temperature inside the home is warmer than outside for much of the year. Warm air holds more moisture&ndash;in the form of water vapor&ndash;than cool air.<br />
                <br />
                </font></li>
                <li><font size="2">The problem is that vapor gradually works its way out of the living area and into the structure. As warm, moist air cools, the vapor begins to condense into water droplets. If that happens inside an unfinished attic, for example, it can get insulation and framing materials wet. That not only reduces the value of your insulation but can cause mold, mildew and rot.<br />
                <br />
                </font></li>
                <li><font size="2">During the summer, when the outside temperature is typically much higher than the inside temperature, attic ventilation serves a different purpose. An unfinished attic builds up a tremendous amount of heat, and if that heated air has no place to escape, it can make the inside of the house much warmer or cause an air conditioning system to work much harder to cool the house.<br />
                <br />
                </font></li>
                <li><font size="2">Building codes specify the minimum amount of attic ventilation needed in a new home to prevent winter moisture buildup, but your summer needs are much greater. Also, older homes were often built with inadequate attic ventilation&ndash;at least by today's standards&ndash;and may need to be retrofitted with proper attic ventilation.<br />
                <br />
                </font></li>
                <li><font size="2">A good attic ventilation system is designed for summer needs. It includes two types of vents: intake vents are placed along the soffit to allow fresh air into the attic, and exhaust vents are installed in the upper third of the roof to allow attic air to escape. The object is to create a continuous &quot;wash&quot; of air along the underside of the roof sheathing. The rule of thumb in the summer is that you should provide enough ventilation to completely change the air in your attic every six minutes.<br />
                <br />
                </font></li>
                <li><font size="2">There are three common types of intake vents:<br />
                <br />
                </font></li>
                <li><font size="2"><strong>Gable vents</strong> are triangular vents installed in the gable wall just below the peak of the roof. As a rule, gable vents are the least effective type of vent, because air circulates only near the gables and does not wash the entire roof.<br />
                <br />
                </font></li>
                <li><font size="2"><strong>Static vents</strong>, also known as roof line or eyebrow vents, consist of a sheet metal cylinder with a flashing collar and a metal hood to keep rain out. They are installed in rows along the face of the roof by cutting holes in the roof, nailing the flashing collars to the roof sheathing and shingling around the vents. Their effectiveness depends on how many are installed; probably their greatest disadvantage is that like any roof penetration, they may leak.<br />
                <br />
                </font></li>
                <li><font size="2"><strong>Soffit vents</strong> are made usually with a screen to keep insects out and of an aluminum panel with louvers punched into the face to allow air flow. They may be 4&quot; or 8&quot; wide and 14&quot; or 22&quot; long, so they'll fit between 16&quot; and 24&quot; on center rafters. They are installed simply by cutting rectangular holes in the soffit and screwing the vent over the hole.<br />
                <br />
                </font></li>
                <li><font size="2">A continuous soffit vent is of similar construction, 4&quot; wide and 96&quot; long. It is installed by cutting a long slot in the soffit and screwing the vent over the hole.<br />
                <br />
                </font></li>
                <li><font size="2"><strong>Circular vents</strong> range from 1&quot; to 8&quot; in diameter. They are installed by drilling holes in the soffit and pressing the vent into the hole.<br />
                <br />
                </font></li>
                <li><font size="2"><strong>Exhaust vents</strong> fall into two basic categories. Static vents simply allow air to escape while power ventilators actively suck air out of the attic. Within each category there are a number of types:<br />
                <br />
                </font></li>
                <li><font size="2"><strong>Ridge vents</strong> are installed along the peak of           the roof and replace the ridge singles.<br />
                <br />
                </font></li>
                <li><font size="2"><strong>Power Ventilators</strong> are turbine vents that consist of a turbine mounted on a sheet metal cylinder. They are installed like roof line vents along the face of the roof. When the wind blows, it spins the turbine, which in turn draws air up out of the attic. Their effectiveness, naturally, depends on whether the wind is blowing or not.<br />
                <br />
                </font></li>
                <li><font size="2">Fan-driven ventilators are powered by electricity and usually controlled by a thermostat in the attic. They are very effective, but since they are motor-driven, the extra cost of running them partially offsets the energy they conserve.<br />
                <br />
                </font></li>
                <li><font size="2">Most builders agree that a ridge vent system is the           most effective as well as the most cost-effective.<br />
                <br />
                </font></li>
                <li><font size="2">The number of vents you'll need depends on the type and size of the vents. Vents are rated according to their square inches of &quot;free vent area&quot; (FVA)&ndash;in other words, the amount of open space in the vent. You can't just measure the size of the vent to find the FVA because the open space is reduced by louvers and by the screen mesh that covers the opening.<br />
                <br />
                </font></li>
                <li><font size="2">Most manufacturers provide both FVA ratings and ventilation recommendations for their products. In order to estimate, you'll need to know the total square footage of your attic and possibly the slope of your roof. To find the square footage of your attic, multiply the width of your house by the length.<br />
                <br />
                </font></li>
                <li><font size="2">Roof slope is expressed as a ratio&ndash;for example, a 5:12 slope means that the roof rises 5&quot; vertically for every 12&quot; of horizontal distance. To find the approximate slope of your roof, go into the attic and measure the vertical distance from the peak of the attic ceiling to the ceiling joists in feet (e.g., a 75&quot; measurement would be 6-1/4').<br />
                <br />
                </font></li>
                <li><font size="2">Multiply that measurement by 24, then divide the result by the width of your house (also in feet). The answer is the first half of your slope ratio. For example, say your house is 30' wide, and the peak-to-ceiling-joist measurement is 75&quot; (6-1/4'): </font>
                <p><font size="2"> 6-1/4 x 24 = 150           </font></p>
                <p><font size="2"> 150 divided by 30 = 5           </font></p>
                <p><font size="2"> Your slope is approximately 5:12           </font></p>
                </li>
            </ul>
            </td>
            <td valign="top"><font size="2" color="#ff0000" font="">
            <p><img src="http://images.doityourself.com/stry/5031.jpg" alt="Gable vents are common in older homes; unfortunately, they are often inadequate because air flow is limited inside the attic." /> <br />
            <img src="http://images.doityourself.com/stry/5032.jpg" alt="Roof line or eyebrow vents provide reasonably good ventilation&ndash;as long as you have enough of them." /> <br />
            <img src="http://images.doityourself.com/stry/5033.jpg" alt="Turbine vents draw air out of the attic when spun by the wind. They can be very effective, but their effectiveness is reduced when the wind isn't blowing." /> <br />
            <img src="http://images.doityourself.com/stry/5034.jpg" alt="A fan-driven power ventilator works well but consumes some of the energy you save in reduced air conditioner use." /> <br />
            <img src="http://images.doityourself.com/stry/5035.jpg" alt="Any ventilation system depends on intake vents installed in the soffit to draw fresh air into the attic." /> <br />
            <img src="http://images.doityourself.com/stry/5036.jpg" alt="Most experts agree that the most effective attic ventilation system consists of intake vents spaced regularly along the soffit and a ridge vent running the length of the roof. This creates an even wash of air along the entire underside of the roof sheathing." /></p>
            </font></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
            <td colspan="3"><hr />
            </td>
        </tr>
    </tbody>
</table>
<center>                   <hr align="left" />
<br />
<center>                                     </center>                 </center>                 <br />
<table border="0">
    <tbody>
        <tr>
            <td valign="top">&nbsp;<strong>INSTALLING ATTIC VENTS</strong>
            <ul>
                <li><font size="2">Installing attic vents in an existing roof is a relatively simple job that most do-it-yourselfers can handle. Remember to follow basic safety procedures when working on the roof:<br />
                <br />
                </font></li>
                <li><font size="2">Wear loose clothing and rubber-soled shoes with good ankle support.<br />
                <br />
                </font></li>
                <li><font size="2">Only work on the roof in dry, calm weather.<br />
                <br />
                </font></li>
                <li><font size="2">Be alert for slippery or loose shingles or rotten decking           that you might put a foot through.<br />
                <br />
                </font></li>
                <li><font size="2">Avoid power lines and TV antennas.<br />
                <br />
                </font></li>
                <li><font size="2">Keep children and pets away from the area so they aren't           hurt if something falls off the roof.<br />
                <br />
                </font></li>
                <li><font size="2">Your extension ladder should be angled so the base is away from the wall a distance equal to 1/4 of the ladder's length plus the width of the soffit.<br />
                <br />
                </font></li>
                <li><font size="2"><strong>Intake Vents</strong>&ndash;To install intake vents, set your circular saw blade to a depth about 1/8&quot; greater than the thickness of the soffit (soffit materials are usually 1/4&quot; thick). Lay out the location of the vent between the rafters, then cut the hole with the circular saw. Screw the vent to the soffit, covering the hole.<br />
                <br />
                </font></li>
                <li><font size="2">If you have fiberglass blanket insulation in your attic, make sure the blankets are positioned so they cover the top of the exterior wall but still allow at least a 1&quot; space between the top of the insulation and the underside of the roof sheathing. Otherwise, the insulation will block the air flow and your soffit vents will be useless.<br />
                <br />
                </font></li>
                <li><font size="2">If you have loose fill insulation in your attic, you'll need to install baffles in each rafter cavity that contains a soffit vent to keep the air space clear.<br />
                <br />
                </font></li>
                <li><font size="2"><strong>Roof Line/Turbine Vents</strong>&ndash;To install roof line or turbine vents, first locate the vent between two rafters. Use a utility knife to cut away the shingles and felt paper, then use a saber saw to cut a hole in the roof the same size as the throat of the vent.<br />
                <br />
                </font></li>
                <li><font size="2">Butter the inside of the vent base with plastic roof cement, then slip the base into position over the hole. The top of the flashing should be slipped under the shingles above the hole and lap over them below the hole. Nail the base in place with 1-1/2&quot; galvanized roofing nails and cover the nail heads with roof cement.<br />
                <br />
                </font></li>
                <li><font size="2">If you're installing a turbine vent, slip the turbine onto the base and level it. Fasten the turbine in place with sheet metal screws.<br />
                <br />
                </font></li>
                <li><font size="2"><strong>Gable Vent</strong>&ndash;To install a gable vent, cut away the siding and sheathing with a circular saw. Be careful not to cut too deeply into the gable studs. Caulk the rim of the gable vent, then set it over the hole and fasten it in place with screws.<br />
                <br />
                </font></li>
                <li><font size="2"><strong>Ridge Vent</strong>&ndash;To install a ridge vent, first remove the ridge shingles as specified by the vent manufacturer&ndash;usually to within 6&quot; of the end of the ridge or a foot from a chimney or roof intersection. Cut away the felt paper with a utility knife and pull out all staples and roofing nails.<br />
                <br />
                </font></li>
                <li><font size="2">Snap a chalk line along the roof sheathing on either side of the ridge; the manufacturer's instructions will tell you how far from the peak the line should be. Set your circular saw blade to a depth slightly thicker than the sheathing, then cut away the sheathing along the line. Remove the cut pieces of sheathing and any nails that remain.<br />
                <br />
                </font></li>
                <li><font size="2">Install the ridge vent over the peak. You can start the vent at the end of the roof or the beginning of the slot, whichever the manufacturer recommends. Different ridge vent systems use different methods of making the vent weather-tight; follow the manufacturer's instructions. </font></li>
            </ul>
            </td>
            <td valign="top"><font size="3" font="">      		<a href="http://images.doityourself.com/animations/how2u/index1.swf" target="_blank"><img border="0" src="http://images.doityourself.com/stry/5037.jpg" alt="Install baffles to keep loose fill insulation from spilling onto intake vents and blocking them." /> <br />
            </a><strong><font size="3" color="#ff0000">Click on drawing above to view animation.</font></strong> <img src="http://images.doityourself.com/stry/5038.jpg" alt="To install a ridge vent, first remove the ridge shingles and cut away the sheathing so the ridge is open." /> <br />
            <img src="http://images.doityourself.com/stry/5039.jpg" alt="Cover the open ridge with the ridge vent, fastened according to the manufacturer's instructions." /> <br />
            </font></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
            <td colspan="3"><hr />
            </td>
        </tr>
    </tbody>
</table>
</font><left><font size="3" font=""> </font>     </left></p>
<p><font size="3" color="black" font=""><strong>TOOL AND MATERIAL CHECKLIST</strong></font></p>
<ul>
    <li><font size="3" font="">Intake Vents</font></li>
    <li><font size="3" font="">Steel Tape Measure</font></li>
    <li><font size="3" font="">Utility Knife</font></li>
    <li><font size="3" font="">Screwdriver</font></li>
    <li><font size="3" font="">Saber Saw</font></li>
    <li><font size="3" font="">Putty Knife</font></li>
    <li><font size="3" font="">Pencil</font></li>
    <li><font size="3" font="">Screws</font></li>
    <li><font size="3" font="">Ladder</font></li>
    <li><font size="3" font="">Exhaust Vents</font></li>
    <li><font size="3" font="">Level</font></li>
    <li><font size="3" font="">Hammer</font></li>
    <li><font size="3" font="">Circular Saw</font></li>
    <li><font size="3" font="">Plastic Roof Cement</font></li>
    <li><font size="3" font="">Chalk Line</font></li>
    <li><font size="3" font="">Nails</font></li>
    <li><font size="3" font="">Eye Protection</font><font size="3" font=""><font size="3" font="">
    <table border="0">
        <tbody>
            <tr>
                <td valign="top" colspan="2">&nbsp;</td>
            </tr>
        </tbody>
    </table>
    </font></font></li>
</ul>]]></description>
		</item>
		
			<item>
			<link>http://www.bluestrait.com/blog/article.asp?id=270</link>
			<title><![CDATA[How to replace Flyscreen Mesh]]></title>
			<author>bluestrait@gmail.com(黄敏)</author>
			<category><![CDATA[DIY]]></category>
			<pubDate>Mon,16 Nov 2009 23:22:33 +0800</pubDate>
			<guid>http://www.bluestrait.com/blog/default.asp?id=270</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[<div align="left">
<h1>How to replace Flyscreen Mesh</h1>
</div>
<p>This handyman hint explains how to replace the mesh in a flyscreen door.</p>
<p><a rel="nofollow" href="http://www.maroochydorehandyman.com.au/image_library/tip-flyscreen.gif"><img height="210" border="0" align="right" width="158" src="http://www.maroochydorehandyman.com.au/image_library/tip-flyscreen-s.gif" alt="How to replace Flyscreen Mesh" /></a>To replace the mesh in your flyscreen doors and windows, start by&nbsp;measuring the height then the width of the&nbsp;flyscreen you wish to replace. &nbsp;You will need a minimum of 75mm to 100mm (3 to 4 inches) extra all round.&nbsp; Write these measurements down and take them to your local hardware store.&nbsp; Meshing is sold&nbsp;in widths of 900mm (about 3 feet) and 1200mm (about 4 feet).</p>
<p>When you get home again, remove the screen&nbsp;by lifting and then twisting one corner out, then slide the screen out completely.&nbsp; Remove the rubber tubing that holds the mesh into the frame by prying up at the join,&nbsp; pull gently until it comes free. Now you can remove the old mesh and dispose of in the rubbish bin.</p>
<p>&nbsp;Lay the new mesh over the screen door and then push the rubber tubing into the slot at one corner, on the longest side of your screen.&nbsp; You can purchase a wheel at the hardware store for this job. Alternatively, you can use a small piece of timber dowel or the handle of an old dinner knife with a very blunt blade.&nbsp; Holding it at an angle to the mesh and apply downward pressure.&nbsp;&nbsp;</p>
<p>Continue down one side until finished.&nbsp;&nbsp; I find it best to then do the opposite side to the first.&nbsp; Don&rsquo;t pull the mesh too tight, as the mesh is tightened as it is forced into the groove by the tubing.&nbsp; Watch that the mesh is kept straight, that is, the weave in the mesh is parallel to the screen.&nbsp;</p>
<p>Then you can proceed to the top edge and finally the bottom edge; again do not pull the mesh too tight.&nbsp; Let the tubing do this for you.&nbsp; Now trim off the excess mesh very CAREFULLY, using a sharp knife.&nbsp;</p>
<p>When you have finished put the screen back into place one corner first then wiggle the screen into place.&nbsp;</p>
<p>Hey, that wasn&rsquo;t so bad was it?&nbsp; Remember that practice makes perfect.</p>]]></description>
		</item>
		
			<item>
			<link>http://www.bluestrait.com/blog/article.asp?id=260</link>
			<title><![CDATA[How to set up and install a drip irrigation syste]]></title>
			<author>bluestrait@gmail.com(黄敏)</author>
			<category><![CDATA[DIY]]></category>
			<pubDate>Sun,01 Nov 2009 19:13:56 +0800</pubDate>
			<guid>http://www.bluestrait.com/blog/default.asp?id=260</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[<p><a href="http://www.diyirrigation.com.au/help.php?section=drip_system" target="_blank">http://www.diyirrigation.com.au/help.php?section=drip_system</a>&nbsp; info only.</p>
<p>DIY&nbsp;guide of installing a Netafim Smart Drip System <a href="http://www.bluestrait.com/blog/attachments/month_0911/52009111191252.pdf"><img border="0" style="margin: 0px 2px -4px 0px;" alt="" src="http://www.bluestrait.com/blog/../../images/download.gif" />点击下载此文件</a>&nbsp; , a bit too simple.</p>
<p><a href="http://www.duralirrigation.com.au/diyirrigation.cfm" target="_blank">Designing an Irrigation System</a>&nbsp; seems pretty good. </p>
<p>&nbsp;</p>
<p>&nbsp;</p>
<p>&nbsp;</p>]]></description>
		</item>
		
			<item>
			<link>http://www.bluestrait.com/blog/article.asp?id=251</link>
			<title><![CDATA[Rain Water Tank DIY guide]]></title>
			<author>bluestrait@gmail.com(黄敏)</author>
			<category><![CDATA[DIY]]></category>
			<pubDate>Sun,18 Oct 2009 20:14:40 +0800</pubDate>
			<guid>http://www.bluestrait.com/blog/default.asp?id=251</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[This is the best article I have found from the Internet. Copyright belongs to o&#114;iginal owner: <a href="http://www.savemygarden.com.au/easy_diy.html" target="_blank" rel="external">http://www.savemygarden.com.au/easy_diy.html</a><br/><br/><img src="http://www.bluestrait.com/blog/images/download.gif" alt="下载文件" style="margin:0px 2px -4px 0px"/> <a href="http://www.bluestrait.com/blog/attachments/month_0910/k20091018201411.pdf" target="_blank">点击下载此文件</a><br/>]]></description>
		</item>
		
			<item>
			<link>http://www.bluestrait.com/blog/article.asp?id=244</link>
			<title><![CDATA[Telephone line wiring]]></title>
			<author>bluestrait@gmail.com(黄敏)</author>
			<category><![CDATA[DIY]]></category>
			<pubDate>Mon,05 Oct 2009 17:56:00 +0800</pubDate>
			<guid>http://www.bluestrait.com/blog/default.asp?id=244</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[<p>First of all, it is better to use a cat5/6 cable (eight-strand)to replace the old fashioned four-strand wire.<br />
<br />
<img border="0" alt="" src="http://www.ling.upenn.edu/%7Ekurisuto/phone/ph_eight-strand.png" title="在新窗口打开图片" style="cursor: pointer;" /><br />
<br />
4-core cable has Red + Green, Yellow + Black.<br />
Red/Green = Line 1<br />
Yellow/Black = Line 2<br />
<br />
Some 4-core cable has&nbsp;&nbsp;blue + white, and then red + black.<br />
<br />
Pins 3+4 is the standard for Line1 in australia. <br />
<br />
3 = Red<br />
4 = Green<br />
<br />
Pair 1 equivalent Colours:<br />
Telstra Cable: White and Blue<br />
2 Pair Cable: Green and Red<br />
CAT5/6 Cable: White-Blue and Blue<br />
<br />
Pair 2:<br />
Telstra Cable: Black and Red<br />
2 Pair Cable: Yellow and Black<br />
CAT5/6 Cable: White-Orange and orange<br />
&nbsp;</p>
<h1>Telephone Plugs and Sockets for Australia</h1>
<a href="http://www.ji.com.au/technical/">Technical and Reference</a>
<p>&gt;&gt; Telephone Plugs and Sockets for Australia</p>
<br />
<h2>Introduction</h2>
<img width="187" hspace="0" height="212" border="0" align="right" src="http://www.ji.com.au/images/technical.jpg" alt="" /><br />
<p>There are currently three different types of line termination connectors used in Australia for telephone and data use.</p>
<br />
<br />
<h2>Definitions</h2>
<b>600 Series - Australian Style</b><br />
<p>This series is what is commonly called the &quot;old Australian type&quot; and has been installed in Australia, primarily by Telstra, for  approximately 30 years. There is a huge installed base of this type of connector.</p>
<br />
<br />
<b>RJ12 series - US modular</b><br />
<p>This type of connector has been installed in Australia for a period of approximately 5 years, originally developed in the USA by Bell Labs (the same Bell that invented the telephone) by engineers Charles Krumreich and Edwin Hardesty, it has now become the most widely used telephone connector in the world. You will see it is used in the connection port for most telephones, faxes etc.</p>
<br />
<br />
<p>This connector is quite often misnamed, however in Australia it is commonly called the RJ12. In the USA it is called RJ11 or RJ14, depending on wiring configuration. RJ12 can used to connect a maximum of 6 wires.</p>
<br />
<br />
<p>RJ stands for &quot;registered jack&quot; - not Ross Jackson, our MD, as many people think !</p>
<br />
<br />
<b>RJ45 series - US modular</b><br />
<p>This connector is an evolution of the RJ12, having a wider body to allow 8 wires to be connected. Telstra and Optus, amongst others, are installing this connector into homes and offices across Australia.</p>
<br />
<br />
<p>It cannot be plugged into a RJ12 socket, however, a RJ12 can be plugged into a RJ45 socket, using a reducing sleeve.</p>
<br />
<br />
<h2>Australian 600 Series Details</h2>
<br />
<img src="http://www.ji.com.au/images/605_6100.jpg" alt="" /><br />
<br />
<p>How to install</p>
<br />
<img width="380" hspace="0" height="110" border="0" src="http://www.ji.com.au/images/plug_ins.jpg" alt="Installation Diagram" /><br />
<strong>1.</strong>
<p>Loosen screw &quot;A&quot; and remove the cover.</p>
<br />
<strong>2.</strong>
<p>Remove screw &quot;B&quot; and withdraw the plug.</p>
<br />
<strong>3.</strong>
<p>Replace screw &quot;B&quot; and make sure it sits flush. If the screw is too long replace it.</p>
<br />
<strong>4.</strong>
<p>Replace cover and tighten screw &quot;A&quot;</p>
<br />
<br />
<b>Telstra Colour Coding</b><br />
<img width="380" hspace="0" height="145" border="0" src="http://www.ji.com.au/images/telstra_.jpg" alt="Telstra Colour Coding" /><br />
<table width="300" cellspacing="0" cellpadding="0" border="0">
    <tbody>
        <tr>
            <td width="100" height="30"><center><font color="#045c98" size="2"><b><u>PAIR</u></b></font></center></td>
            <td width="100"><center><font color="#045c98" size="2"><b><u>TIP (L+)</u></b></font></center></td>
            <td width="100"><center><font color="#045c98" size="2"><b><u>RING (L-)</u></b></font></center></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
            <td width="100"><center><font color="#045c98" size="2">1</font></center></td>
            <td width="100"><center><font color="#045c98" size="2">white (2)</font></center></td>
            <td width="100"><center><font color="#045c98" size="2">blue (6)</font></center></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
            <td width="100"><center><font color="#045c98" size="2">2</font></center></td>
            <td width="100"><center><font color="#045c98" size="2">red</font></center></td>
            <td width="100"><center><font color="#045c98" size="2">black</font></center></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
            <td width="100"><center><font color="#045c98" size="2">3</font></center></td>
            <td width="100"><center><font color="#045c98" size="2">orange</font></center></td>
            <td width="100"><center><font color="#045c98" size="2">green</font></center></td>
        </tr>
    </tbody>
</table>
<br />
<br />
<h2>RJ12 and RJ45 Series Details</h2>
<br />
<br />
<strong>Registered Jacks (RJ)</strong> <br />
<p>Any of the series of jacks, described in the</p>
<i>Code of Federal Regulations</i>
<p>, Title 47,</p>
<b>part 68</b>
<p>, used to provide</p>
<b>interface</b>
<p>to the public</p>
<b>telephone network.</b><br />
<br />
<p>RJ (registered jacks, sometimes described as RJ-XX) are a series of telephone connection interfaces (receptacle and plug) that are registered with the U.S. Federal Communications Commission (FCC). They derive from interfaces that were part of AT&amp;T's Universal Service order Codes (USOC) and were adopted as part of FCC regulations. The term jack in the USA sometimes means both receptacle and plug and sometimes just the receptacle, although in Australia it means socket. A plug is male and a socket is female.</p>
<br />
<br />
<strong>RJ-11</strong><br />
<img width="50" height="75" border="0" align="right" src="http://www.ji.com.au/images/rj110000.gif" alt="RJ11" />
<p>This plug and socket  combination is not used for wall termination. It is the very small connectors used to connect your telephone to the handset..</p>
<br />
<br />
<strong>RJ-12</strong><br />
<img width="67" height="100" border="0" align="right" src="http://www.ji.com.au/images/rj120000.gif" alt="RJ-12" />
<p>As mentioned above, the most common telephone connector in the world is the RJ-12 jack, which can have six conductors but usually is implemented with four or sometimes two. The RJ-12 jack is likely to be a socket that your household or office phones are plugged into. In turn, these sockets connect to the outside longer wires known as twisted pair, which run to the telephone companies switch or to a private branch exchange (PABX). The four wires are usually characterised as a red and green pair and a black and white pair. The red and green pair typically carry voice or data. On an outside phone company connection, the black and white pair may be used for Iow-voltage signals such as phone lights. On a PBX system, they may be used for other kinds of signalling.Your computer modem is usually connected to a RJ-12 jack.</p>
<br />
<br />
<table cellspacing="3" cellpadding="0" border="0">
    <tbody>
        <tr>
            <td colspan="3"><font class="text-content"><strong>6 position / 4 contact modular plugs</strong></font></td>
            <td rowspan="8"><font class="text-content"><img width="84" height="200" border="0" src="http://www.ji.com.au/images/6_positi.jpg" alt="6 Position 4 Contact Modular Plug" /></font></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
            <td>
            <div align="center"><font class="text-content">Plug<br />
            positions</font></div>
            </td>
            <td>
            <div align="center"><font class="text-content">USOC<br />
            RJ14</font></div>
            </td>
            <td>
            <div align="center"><font class="text-content">USOC<br />
            RJ11</font></div>
            </td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
            <td><font class="text-content">1</font></td>
            <td><font class="text-content">&nbsp;</font></td>
            <td><font class="text-content">&nbsp;</font></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
            <td><font class="text-content">2</font></td>
            <td><font class="text-content">white/orange</font></td>
            <td><font class="text-content">&nbsp;</font></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
            <td><font class="text-content">3</font></td>
            <td><font class="text-content">blue/white</font></td>
            <td><font class="text-content">blue/white</font></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
            <td><font class="text-content">4</font></td>
            <td><font class="text-content">white/blue</font></td>
            <td><font class="text-content">white/blue</font></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
            <td><font class="text-content">5</font></td>
            <td><font class="text-content">orange/white</font></td>
            <td><font class="text-content">&nbsp;</font></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
            <td><font class="text-content">6</font></td>
            <td><font class="text-content">&nbsp;</font></td>
            <td><font class="text-content">&nbsp;</font></td>
        </tr>
    </tbody>
</table>
<br />
<br />
<table cellspacing="3" cellpadding="0" border="0">
    <tbody>
        <tr>
            <td colspan="3"><font class="text-content"><strong>6 position / 6 contact modular plugs</strong></font></td>
            <td rowspan="8"><font class="text-content"><img width="84" height="200" border="0" src="http://www.ji.com.au/images/6_positj.jpg" alt="6 Position 6 Contact Modular Plug" /></font></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
            <td>
            <div align="center"><font class="text-content">Plug<br />
            positions</font></div>
            </td>
            <td>
            <div align="center"><font class="text-content">USOC<br />
            RJ25</font></div>
            </td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
            <td><font class="text-content">1</font></td>
            <td><font class="text-content">white/green</font></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
            <td><font class="text-content">2</font></td>
            <td><font class="text-content">white/orange</font></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
            <td><font class="text-content">3</font></td>
            <td><font class="text-content">blue/white</font></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
            <td><font class="text-content">4</font></td>
            <td><font class="text-content">white/blue</font></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
            <td><font class="text-content">5</font></td>
            <td><font class="text-content">orange/white</font></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
            <td><font class="text-content">6</font></td>
            <td><font class="text-content">green/white</font></td>
        </tr>
    </tbody>
</table>
<br />
<br />
<strong>RJ-45</strong><img width="70" height="100" border="0" align="right" src="http://www.ji.com.au/images/rj45_8_8.gif" alt="RJ45" /><br />
<p>As mentioned above, Telstra and Optus are now installing this type of socket in homes. The RJ-45 is a single-line jack for digital transmission over ordinary phone wire, either untwisted or twisted. The interface has eight pins or positions. For connecting a modem, printer, or a data PABX at a data rate up to 19.2Kbps, you can use untwisted wire. For faster transmissions in which you're connecting to an Ethernet 10/100/1000BaseT network, you need to use twisted pair wire. (Untwisted is usually a flat wire like common household phone extension wire. Twisted is often round.).</p>
<br />
<br />
<p>RJ45 is also called Category 5 or &quot;Cat 5&quot; in Australia, which refers to a specification for data transmission. Cat 5 or RJ45 are physically compatible, and both are suitable for telephones or modems depending on data rate requirements.</p>
<br />
<br />
<table cellspacing="3" cellpadding="0" border="0">
    <tbody>
        <tr>
            <td colspan="5"><center><font class="text-content"><strong>8 position modular plugs</strong></font></center></td>
            <td rowspan="10"><img src="http://www.ji.com.au/images/rj45_8_9.gif" alt="" /></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
            <td><font class="text-content">Plug positions</font></td>
            <td><font class="text-content">T568A</font></td>
            <td><font class="text-content">T568B</font></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
            <td><font class="text-content">1</font></td>
            <td><font class="text-content">white/green</font></td>
            <td><font class="text-content">white/orange</font></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
            <td><font class="text-content">2</font></td>
            <td><font class="text-content">green</font></td>
            <td><font class="text-content">orange</font></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
            <td><font class="text-content">3</font></td>
            <td><font class="text-content">white/orange</font></td>
            <td><font class="text-content">white/green</font></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
            <td><font class="text-content">4</font></td>
            <td><font class="text-content">blue</font></td>
            <td><font class="text-content">blue</font></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
            <td><font class="text-content">5</font></td>
            <td><font class="text-content">white/blue</font></td>
            <td><font class="text-content">white/blue</font></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
            <td><font class="text-content">6</font></td>
            <td><font class="text-content">orange</font></td>
            <td><font class="text-content">green</font></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
            <td><font class="text-content">7</font></td>
            <td><font class="text-content">white/brown</font></td>
            <td><font class="text-content">white/brown</font></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
            <td><font class="text-content">8</font></td>
            <td><font class="text-content">brown</font></td>
            <td><font class="text-content">brown</font></td>
        </tr>
    </tbody>
</table>
<br />
<br />
<img width="300" height="218" border="0" src="http://www.ji.com.au/images/flat_cor.gif" alt="Flat Cord (USOC)" /> <br />
<br />
<font class="text-content"><b> Modular Cord Writing</b> <br />
To identify whether a patch cord is wired straight through or cross-over, hold either end of the cable so the plugs are aligned side by side with the contacts facing you (with the clip down and contacts facing upwards) and compare the wire colour coding. If they appear in the same order from left to right the cord is wired straight through. If they appear reversed on the second plug then the cord is a cross-over. <br />
<br />
<b>Useful phone numbers</b>
<table width="380" cellspacing="0" cellpadding="5" border="0">
    <tbody>
        <tr>
            <td width="380"><font class="text-content">Telstra Line Number ID</font></td>
            <td align="right"><font class="text-content">12722123</font></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
            <td width="380"><font class="text-content">Telstra &quot;Call me back&quot; to test ringing</font></td>
            <td align="right"><font class="text-content">12722199</font></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
            <td width="380"><font class="text-content">Telstra Calling Number Display- Block this number prefix</font></td>
            <td align="right"><font class="text-content">1831</font></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
            <td width="380"><font class="text-content">Telstra Calling Number Display- Send this number prefix</font></td>
            <td align="right"><font class="text-content">1832</font></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
            <td width="380"><font class="text-content">Telstra Calling Number Display Status</font></td>
            <td align="right"><font class="text-content">127220</font></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
            <td width="380"><font class="text-content">Telstra Directory Assistance</font></td>
            <td align="right"><font class="text-content">12455</font></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
            <td width="380"><font class="text-content">Telstra Call Connect</font></td>
            <td align="right"><font class="text-content">12456</font></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
            <td width="380"><font class="text-content">Telstra Cable Locations</font></td>
            <td align="right"><font class="text-content">1100</font></td>
        </tr>
    </tbody>
</table>
</font>
<p>&nbsp;</p>]]></description>
		</item>
		
			<item>
			<link>http://www.bluestrait.com/blog/article.asp?id=239</link>
			<title><![CDATA[【转贴】A simple A-frame Chicken coop]]></title>
			<author>bluestrait@gmail.com(黄敏)</author>
			<category><![CDATA[DIY]]></category>
			<pubDate>Mon,21 Sep 2009 18:26:17 +0800</pubDate>
			<guid>http://www.bluestrait.com/blog/default.asp?id=239</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[<div class="articletop">
<div class="h1">
<h1>Chicken coop</h1>
</div>
<cite>Jan 15 09:56am</cite></div>
<div class="articlepic-left"><a href="http://au.lifestyle.yahoo.com/b/better-homes-gardens/479/chicken-coop?view=photos&amp;photo=0"><img width="169" height="169" border="0" alt="" src="http://d.yimg.com/ao/util/anysize/169,http%3A%2F%2Fa323.yahoofs.com%2Fymg%2Fbetterhomesgardens%2Fbetterhomesgardens-852547486-1164159933.jpg%3FymlYVrADSMWNlwUX?sig=Kz_.MT9ZmauyuLLYQwS7vO17B_E-" /></a></div>
<p>A new home for chooks so they don't fly the coop.</p>
<p><a href="http://l.yimg.com/au.yimg.com/i/life/content/chicken_coop_diagram.pdf" target="_blank">DIAGRAM</a><a href="http://www.bluestrait.com/blog/attachments/month_0909/a200992118282.pdf"><img border="0" style="margin: 0px 2px -4px 0px;" alt="" src="http://www.bluestrait.com/blog/../../images/download.gif" />点击下载此文件</a></p>
<p>Fresh are the best! And they taste even better when they've been laid by happy chooks in your own backyard. This A-frame chicken coop can be moved about your yard quite easily and will keep your hens feeling clucky, safe and right at home.</p>
<p>A chicken coop that can be lifted and moved around the garden is a great way to fertilise the yard while the chickens enjoy a feast of bugs, pests and weeds. The coop has everything that opens and shuts to lock away your chooks at night plus give you easy access to collect eggs.</p>
<p>Chooks are great pets to keep around the home: they eat food scraps, produce fantastic natural fertiliser, keep pests down in your garden and lay eggs.</p>
<p>Kids also love feeding them, hunting for their eggs and playing with them. This simple, moveable chicken coop is a great way to house your birds and is large enough to accommodate up to six full-sized chooks or eight bantams.<br />
<br />
Hens need a home, especially during the night to keep them safe from foxes and domestic animals, which will kill your birds if they're not locked away. This coop has wire on the floor to stop predators from digging their way into it. However, during the day, chickens are much happier to scratch around the backyard looking for worms, insects, weeds and whatever else they can find to eat. Just make sure the backyard is enclosed and the flight feathers on the hens are clipped.<br />
<br />
But before you rush out and buy half-a-dozen hens or build a chook house, check your local council's regulations and requirements for keeping poultry. Some discourage keeping chooks, others ban roosters. It's also a good idea to chat with your neighbours before proceeding. Whatever the result, keeping a rooster will probably be out of the question because early morning wake-up calls do not make for happy neighbours. Besides, you probably want to eat the eggs, not breed chickens.</p>
<p><strong>You'll need<br />
(See diagram)</strong></p>
<p><strong>A</strong> Frame uprights (8) 70 x 35 x 1220mmTreated pine</p>
<p><strong>B</strong> Narrow ties (4) 70 x 22 x 635mm Treated pine decking 81 Wide ties (2) 90 x 22 x 635mm Treated pine decking</p>
<p><strong>C</strong> End panels (2) 635 x 628 x 4mm Bracing ply</p>
<p><strong>D</strong> Gussets (2) 310 x 263 x 4mm Bracing ply</p>
<p><strong>E</strong> Ridge 90 x 22 x 1800mm Treated pine decking</p>
<p><strong>F</strong> Bottom plates (2) 90 x 45 x 1800mm Treated pine</p>
<p><strong>G</strong> Side rails (4) 70 x 22 x 422mm Treated pine decking</p>
<p><strong>H</strong> Back panel 1800 x 616 x 4mm Bracing ply</p>
<p><strong>I</strong> Handles (2) 90 x 45 x 2400mm Treated pine</p>
<p><strong>J</strong> Box slats (12) 90 x 22 x 330mm Treated pine decking</p>
<p><strong>K</strong> Back panel support 70 x 22 x 1000mm Treated pine decking</p>
<p><strong>L</strong> Bottom end rails (2) 90 x 45 x 1100mm Treated pine</p>
<p><strong>M</strong> Small door stiles (2) 42 x 18 x 515mm LOSP pine N Small door rails (2) 42 x 18 x 296mm LOSP pine</p>
<p><strong>O</strong> Small door panel 515 x 380 x 4mm Bracing ply</p>
<p><strong>P</strong> Large door stiles (2) 42 x 18 x 515mm LOSP pine</p>
<p><strong>Q</strong> Large door rails (2) 42 x 18 x 946mm LOSP pine</p>
<p><strong>R</strong> Large door mullion 42 x 18 x 431 mm LOSP pine</p>
<p><strong>S</strong> Large door panel 1030 x 515 x 4mm Bracing ply</p>
<p><strong>T</strong> Bottom stiles (2) 42 x 18 x 500mm LOSP pine</p>
<p><strong>U</strong> Bottom door rail (2) 42 x 18 x 296mm LOSP pine</p>
<p><strong>V</strong> Hinge blocks (6) 40 x 19 x 90mm LOSP pine</p>
<p><strong>W</strong> Small end rails (2) 70 x45x481mmTreated pine</p>
<p><strong>X</strong> Perch (not shown) 90 x 22 x 1115mmTreated pine decking</p>
<p><strong>You'll also need:<br />
</strong>10m x 1200mm of galvanised 25 x 25 x 1.25mm welded mesh; galvanised staples or U nails; 2 x T-hinges; 6 x 50mm strap hinges; 4 latches; feeder, water dispenser, paint</p>
<p><strong>STEP 1</strong><br />
Cut 1 end of each of the main framing uprights (A) at an angle of 65 degrees. To do this, use a protractor to set a sliding bevel to exactly 65 degrees. Mark the angle. Measure 1192mm along the timber, mark the same 65 degrees angle with the bevel and cut to length. Measure 25mm across the top bevel of each upright, square a line down from this point to form a right angle and then cut off the triangular section.</p>
<p>Chickens are safe and fun pets, and are great for teaching children responsibility.</p>
<p><strong>STEP 2</strong><br />
Screw together pairs of uprights to form A-frames. Cut both ends of the narrow and wide ties (B, B1) at an angle of 65 degrees. Mark 499mm from the bottom of each upright and screw 2 narrow ties to 2 of the frames and the 2 wide ties to the other 2 frames with the bottom edge of the ties on the marks. Screw the remaining narrow ties to the back of the 2 frames with the wide ties.</p>
<div class="articlepic-right"><a href="http://au.lifestyle.yahoo.com/b/better-homes-gardens/479/chicken-coop?view=photos&amp;photo=1"><img width="169" height="127" border="0" alt="" src="http://d.yimg.com/ao/util/anysize/169,http%3A%2F%2Fa323.yahoofs.com%2Fymg%2Fbetterhomesgardens%2Fbetterhomesgardens-85918382-1164159934.jpg%3FymmYVrADLbZJjkCa?sig=yYI0DpQ.idpYT3MLK0zB_X.w5WA-" /></a></div>
<p><strong>STEP 3</strong></p>
<p>Use the A-frames as a template to mark out the end panels (C) and cut with a panel saw. Unscrew the narrow ties, and nail on the plywood with flat head nails. Replace the ties again and nail panel into the tie. Similarly, cut the gussets (D) for the internal frames and nail on.</p>
<p><strong>STEP 4</strong><br />
Screw the top ridge (E) to the end frames, with the back edge 5mm proud of the top of the frame and overhanging on the door side. The plywood end panels face inward. Measure 400mm from the end and screw on the intermediate A-frames with the plywood gussets facing towards the ends and the inside edge of the frames on the mark. Screw the outer A-frames to the bottom plates (F), then measure 400mm from ends to locate the intermediate frames.</p>
<div class="articlepic-right"><a href="http://au.lifestyle.yahoo.com/b/better-homes-gardens/479/chicken-coop?view=photos&amp;photo=2"><img width="169" height="127" border="0" alt="" src="http://d.yimg.com/ao/util/anysize/169,http%3A%2F%2Fa323.yahoofs.com%2Fymg%2Fbetterhomesgardens%2Fbetterhomesgardens-17243874-1164159936.jpg%3FymmYVrADuGta2c4Z?sig=FcFryjM9QLu5jiVZj3zWaWTJV30-" /></a></div>
<p><strong>STEP 5</strong></p>
<p>Fix the side rails (G) to the A-frames, screwing them at the same height as the ties in the A-frame. Nail the back panel (H) to the frame, then add the two handles (I) to either side.</p>
<div class="articlepic-right"><a href="http://au.lifestyle.yahoo.com/b/better-homes-gardens/479/chicken-coop?view=photos&amp;photo=3"><img width="169" height="127" border="0" alt="" src="http://d.yimg.com/ao/util/anysize/169,http%3A%2F%2Fa323.yahoofs.com%2Fymg%2Fbetterhomesgardens%2Fbetterhomesgardens-404044910-1164159937.jpg%3FymmYVrADtLVsYug0?sig=YMqDGgDN1IHCjO9e3xU5EWSHI.o-" /></a></div>
<p><strong>STEP 6</strong></p>
<p>Turn the unit on its side and add the brooding box slats (J), screwing them on from the underside and spacing them equally between the sides. The gaps between the slats allow air to circulate. While tipped over, add the back panel support batten (K) under the ridge and nail the back panel to it. Cut the bottom rails (L) with a 65 degree angle at each end and screw to the bottom plates and end A-frames.</p>
<div class="articlepic-right"><a href="http://au.lifestyle.yahoo.com/b/better-homes-gardens/479/chicken-coop?view=photos&amp;photo=4"><img width="169" height="127" border="0" alt="" src="http://d.yimg.com/ao/util/anysize/169,http%3A%2F%2Fa323.yahoofs.com%2Fymg%2Fbetterhomesgardens%2Fbetterhomesgardens-632882998-1164159938.jpg%3FymmYVrADAI6IIwH3?sig=9ripwNefEqUrEbmhJdphrFGYhr0-" /></a></div>
<p><strong>STEP 7</strong></p>
<p>To retrieve the eggs, you'll need doors. Screw the small door stiles (M) to the rails (N) using simple butt joints and screws, then nail on the small door panel (O. If you do not have short nails simply nip the ends off 30mm galvanised flat-head nails. Repeat for the other small door and the large door (F Q, R, S). The bottom door (T, U) is made in the same way but covered with chicken wire not plywood. Fit the doors with the strap hinges, using hinge blocks (V) on the upper doors to give them clearance. When everything fits, remove the hinges. Cut the small end rails (W) and screw in place. Add a perch (X) screwed to the underside of the box slats.</p>
<p><strong>STEP 8</strong><br />
Paint all the woodwork with two coats of exterior acrylic paint. We chose Dulux Pesto for the frame and Salvia for the panels. When dry, refit the doors with the hinges.</p>
<p><strong>STEP 9<br />
</strong>Cut the mesh to size with snips to suit each section and with enough extra all round to allow the wire to be stapled to the frame. Use galvanised staples or U nails to hold the wire mesh in place. When starting them off, try holding the staples with long-nosed pliers rather than your fingers.</p>
<div class="articlepic-right"><a href="http://au.lifestyle.yahoo.com/b/better-homes-gardens/479/chicken-coop?view=photos&amp;photo=5"><img width="169" height="127" border="0" alt="" src="http://d.yimg.com/ao/util/anysize/169,http%3A%2F%2Fa323.yahoofs.com%2Fymg%2Fbetterhomesgardens%2Fbetterhomesgardens-706942761-1164159940.jpg%3FymmYVrADTpXLG69y?sig=FpDVgbfmQM5Fc.VmyiL8S9Ylces-" /></a></div>
<p><strong>STEP 10</strong></p>
<p>At the sides remove the side rails and fix the wire underneath before refitting the rails over the top. Fold and nail the wire to the underside of the handles. At the ends remove the bottom rail and nail the wire to the inside edge of the bottom rail, then screw the bottom rail back in place and nail the wire to the rest of the frame. Fit basic catches to the doors to secure them at night.</p>
<p><em>Now you have a chookhouse, you want to know what chickens to buy, where to buy them and how to keep them.</em></p>
<p><strong>For eggs within a week</strong> or so then purchase point-of-lay pullets that are about six months old. Avoid buying chicks - they may grow up to be roosters. Pullets cost about $20 each and lay between 180 and 250 eggs a year.</p>
<p><strong>When you get your hens home,</strong> keep them in the coop for a week to get them used to their new home. Then let them range, but make sure your garden is bait free.</p>
<p><strong>In the hens' brooding boxes,</strong> lay carpet offcuts, pile side down, and top with straw. This will keep your chooks comfortable while nesting and the eggs safe from smashing. Put a fake plastic or china egg in the nest to encourage the chooks to lay.</p>
<p><strong>Feed</strong> the chickens with commercial layer pellets, which have all the vitamins and minerals hens need, and put the pellets in a bird feeder hung away from brooding boxes and perches. An adult hen will eat about 1 kg of food each week, including household food waste. Sprinkle eggshells over your scraps to give the chooks the calcium they need for strong eggs.</p>
<p><strong>Install</strong> an automatic waterer away from the feeder.</p>
<p><strong>Check</strong> the coop daily, and keep the water, food, perches and straw clean to avoid disease and parasites.</p>
<p>For MORE information on keeping hens, visit <a href="http://www.users.on.net/%7Egreggles/">www.users.on.net/~greggles/</a></p>
<p>To buy chooks and pullets, check out Poultry Farmers and Dealers in the Yellow Pages.</p>
<p>Want something bigger? <a href="http://www.bhg.com.au/display.cfm?objectid=16BDCA11-0436-4A30-ADB41BF23F8744E9&amp;navid=8D133D97-03B5-4CB5-ADDE11F0DAE7F4F6" target="_blank">Click here for an even larger chicken house!</a></p>]]></description>
		</item>
		
			<item>
			<link>http://www.bluestrait.com/blog/article.asp?id=232</link>
			<title><![CDATA[【书签】鸡窝设计 Chicken Coop Design]]></title>
			<author>bluestrait@gmail.com(黄敏)</author>
			<category><![CDATA[DIY]]></category>
			<pubDate>Mon,07 Sep 2009 21:50:13 +0800</pubDate>
			<guid>http://www.bluestrait.com/blog/default.asp?id=232</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[<a href="http://www.backyardchickens.com/coopdesigns.html" target="_blank" rel="external">http://www.backyardchickens.com/coopdesigns.html</a>]]></description>
		</item>
		
			<item>
			<link>http://www.bluestrait.com/blog/article.asp?id=218</link>
			<title><![CDATA[timber vendors in Melbourne]]></title>
			<author>bluestrait@gmail.com(黄敏)</author>
			<category><![CDATA[DIY]]></category>
			<pubDate>Sun,09 Aug 2009 16:56:12 +0800</pubDate>
			<guid>http://www.bluestrait.com/blog/default.asp?id=218</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[<strong>Recycled</strong><br/><a href="http://www.ecotimbergroup.com.au/" target="_blank" rel="external">http://www.ecotimbergroup.com.au/</a><br/>Eco Timber Group Pty Ltd<br/>418 Burnley St (cnr Madden Grv)<br/>Richmond 3121 VIC<br/><br/>Phone: 03 9421 6866<br/>Mobile: 0408 127 174<br/>Fax: (03) 9421 6877<br/><br/>Email: rupert@ecotimbergroup.com.au<br/>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;josh@ecotimbergroup.com.au <br/><br/><a href="http://www.bowerbirdtimber.com/index.html" target="_blank" rel="external">http://www.bowerbirdtimber.com/index.html</a><br/><a href="http://www.urbansalvage.com.au/" target="_blank" rel="external">http://www.urbansalvage.com.au/</a><br/><br/><a href="http://www.recycledtimber.com.au/" target="_blank" rel="external">http://www.recycledtimber.com.au/</a><br/><br/><br/><strong>new</strong><br/><a href="http://www.afttimbers.com/" target="_blank" rel="external">http://www.afttimbers.com/</a><br/><a href="http://www.mathewstimber.com.au/" target="_blank" rel="external">http://www.mathewstimber.com.au/</a><br/><a href="http://www.thewoodsmith.com.au/thewoodsmith/" target="_blank" rel="external">http://www.thewoodsmith.com.au/thewoodsmith/</a><br/><br/><strong>Last but not the least, list of wood vendors</strong><br/><a href="http://www.vwa.org.au/list_timbven.htm" target="_blank" rel="external">http://www.vwa.org.au/list_timbven.htm</a>]]></description>
		</item>
		
			<item>
			<link>http://www.bluestrait.com/blog/article.asp?id=217</link>
			<title><![CDATA[新进工具：AEG BS12C 12v Cordless Drill Driver ]]></title>
			<author>bluestrait@gmail.com(黄敏)</author>
			<category><![CDATA[DIY]]></category>
			<pubDate>Sat,08 Aug 2009 20:52:22 +0800</pubDate>
			<guid>http://www.bluestrait.com/blog/default.asp?id=217</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[一直想在上个cordless screw driver。现有的唯一的metabo drill要做screwdriver用时还要在钻头和螺丝头之间换来换去，麻烦。<br/><br/>最近做了两个project后终于受够了手工拧螺丝的麻烦，跑到bunnings买了这个：<br/><br/>AEG BS12C 12v Cordless Drill Driver + 2 Lithium Ion Batteries 1.5Ah<br/><br/>Features:<br/>- One sleeve Keyless Chuck - For quick bit change with one hand<br/>- 18-step Torque adjustment - The right torque for every screw size<br/>- Metal Gear Housing - For long tool life<br/>- Built-in LED - For illumination of dark work spots<br/>- Variable Speed Trigger - For output power control<br/>- Forward /Reverse Motion - for effective screw driving<br/><br/>Specifications:<br/>Battery Voltage / Capacity - 12v / 1.5 Ah Li-ion<br/>No load speed - 0 to 575rpm<br/>Chuck - 10mm Keyless chuck<br/>Max. drilling capacity in steel / wood - 10 /20mm<br/>Wood screws - 6mm<br/>Max. torque soft joint / hard joint - 9.3 / 18.5Nm<br/>Weight with battery pack - 1.1kg<br/>Dimensions (LxHxW) - 160 x 190 x 53mm<br/><br/>Includes:<br/>Batteries - 2 x 12V 1.5Ah Li-ion<br/>Charger<br/>Carry Case<br/><br/><img src="http://www.bluestrait.com/bluegallery/pictures/2009_08_04_workshop/img_0730_m.jpg" border="0" alt=""/><br/><br/><img src="http://www.bluestrait.com/bluegallery/pictures/2009_08_04_workshop/img_0732_m.jpg" border="0" alt=""/><br/><br/><img src="http://www.bluestrait.com/bluegallery/pictures/2009_08_04_workshop/img_0733_m.jpg" border="0" alt=""/><br/><br/><img src="http://www.bluestrait.com/bluegallery/pictures/2009_08_04_workshop/img_0734_m.jpg" border="0" alt=""/><br/><br/><img src="http://www.bluestrait.com/bluegallery/pictures/2009_08_04_workshop/img_0735_m.jpg" border="0" alt=""/><br/><br/>非常喜欢它的颜色和外形设计（呵呵，以貌取人）。<br/><br/>1.1公斤重，手感挺沉但很好。转速稍低，做电钻可能略显不足。初步使用之后感觉钻软木还可以接受，而作为driver打到7或8档toque时可以在松木上不需pilot hole直接拧进8g的螺钉。<br/><br/>本来是奔着Bosch GSR 10.8 Li2 去的，结果bunnings堕落到什么都没有了。只好选择了这个, AUD$239，希望这个三年保修可以弥补一下。<br/><br/>以后买工具再不去bunnings，还是去专业的工具店好了。]]></description>
		</item>
		
			<item>
			<link>http://www.bluestrait.com/blog/article.asp?id=215</link>
			<title><![CDATA[[转贴] video of woodworking get started!]]></title>
			<author>bluestrait@gmail.com(黄敏)</author>
			<category><![CDATA[DIY]]></category>
			<pubDate>Thu,06 Aug 2009 22:52:16 +0800</pubDate>
			<guid>http://www.bluestrait.com/blog/default.asp?id=215</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[Great for a woodworking beginner:<br/><br/><a href="http://www.finewoodworking.com/getting-started/index.asp" target="_blank" rel="external">http://www.finewoodworking.com/getting-started/index.asp</a>]]></description>
		</item>
		
			<item>
			<link>http://www.bluestrait.com/blog/article.asp?id=214</link>
			<title><![CDATA[[转贴] Cordless Impact Drivers]]></title>
			<author>bluestrait@gmail.com(黄敏)</author>
			<category><![CDATA[DIY]]></category>
			<pubDate>Thu,06 Aug 2009 16:21:12 +0800</pubDate>
			<guid>http://www.bluestrait.com/blog/default.asp?id=214</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[<h1><span><span id="lblName">Cordless Impact Drivers</span></span></h1>
<p><span id="lblContent">
<div id="HomePageSample2">
<h3>How Do Cordless Impact Drivers And Cordless Drills Compare?</h3>
<img height="150" border="0" align="right" width="150" alt="cordless impact driver" src="http://www.cordlessdrillworld.com/images/resources/impact1.gif" /> Although they obviously look similar you should not compare a cordless drill and a cordless impact driver as internally they are very different, a cordless drill creates a continual amount of inline torque whereas the cordless impact driver uses an internal spring loaded pulsating cam and gear mechanism which creates pulsating rotational torque.<br />
<br />
This effect is similar to that of a hammer tapping on a wrench to loosen a stubborn nut or bolt - any it delivers much more torque.
<h3>How Much Power Does An Impact Driver Actually Have??</h3>
<img height="150" border="0" align="right" width="150" alt="cordless impact driver" src="http://www.cordlessdrillworld.com/images/resources/impact2.gif" /> In action they will function like a cordless drill until greater torque is needed, at this point the spring and the cam mechanism mentioned above comes into play, adding up to 2500 blows per minute to the output of torque, this effectively can triple the torque output available.<br />
<br />
For example a 12 volt impact driver can deliver up to 1000 inch pounds of torque compared to say 300 to 400 inch pounds of a cordless drill.
<h3>Cordless Impact Drivers Are Easier To Hold</h3>
<img height="150" border="0" align="right" width="150" alt="cordless impact driver" src="http://www.cordlessdrillworld.com/images/resources/impact3.gif" />The Other major difference of a cordless impact driver is how it delivers its torque, a cordless drill user most literary hold onto the drill to counter its torque otherwise the drill will spin out of the user's hand.<br />
<br />
However the cordless impact driver's torque is converted directly onto the screwdriver head, this allows you to easily hold the drill with one hand without noticing any significant amount of reactionary torque - this feature is great if you use a cordless tool all day as it eliminates arm strain and vastly reduces wrist problems.
<h3>Other Features of Impact Drivers</h3>
<img height="150" border="0" align="right" width="150" alt="cordless impact driver" src="http://www.cordlessdrillworld.com/images/resources/impact4.gif" /> Cordless impact drivers are very compact and are generally half the size of a cordless drill, this makes them very useful for getting into confined spaces such as overhead ducting and Cabinet assembly jobs, they also generally weigh less as well, a cordless impact driver normally weighs around three to 4 pounds compared to 6 to 9 pounds of a cordless drill.<br />
<br />
Impact drivers do make more noise than a conventional drill/driver as the cam mechanism makes a chattering type of sound when it is activated, the battery life of a cordless impact driver is generally greater than a cordless drill as the cam action increases the maximum torque without increasing the battery drain.
<h3>Who Should Use A Cordless Impact Driver??</h3>
Contractors typically use cordless impact drivers to drive heavy duty fittings into concrete and other masonry, they also used to drive metal screw into duct work and electrical service panels as well as driving drywall screws and heavy decking screws.&nbsp;If a cordless impact driver is fitted with an impact socket type adapter they can be used to drive 8 inch bolts into pressure treated timber with ease.<br />
<br />
All of these capabilities make impact drivers are indispensable tool to electricians, Cabinet installers, roofing contractors and deck builders and any other tradesmen who needs a powerful and compact method of driving screws and bolts.
<h3>Should I Buy A Cordless Impact Driver??</h3>
A good question, we would say if you are a contractor who needs a large amount of driving torque to drive fittings into robust materials then the cordless impact driver is for you, if you are a DIY user who needs a all purpose cordless tool then go for a cordless drill/driver of around 12volts or above, they have lots of torque and will drive heavy screws into most materials with ease.
<h3>What Is The Best Cordless Impact Driver At The Moment??</h3>
Well currently we prefer the <a href="http://www.cordlessdrillworld.com/custom.aspx?id=11">Makita 6980FDWDEX 12-Volt Cordless Impact Driver Kit with Free 6217D MForce Drill</a>, it has an insane amount of torque, around 1000 inch lbs which is more than enough for any contractor, is well made and comes supplied with two batteries and also currently has a <b>free Makita Cordless Drill</b> included in the package - need we say more!! Buy It!!!!.</div>
</span></p>
<p>&nbsp;</p>]]></description>
		</item>
		
			<item>
			<link>http://www.bluestrait.com/blog/article.asp?id=213</link>
			<title><![CDATA[制作工作间的工具架]]></title>
			<author>bluestrait@gmail.com(黄敏)</author>
			<category><![CDATA[DIY]]></category>
			<pubDate>Tue,04 Aug 2009 15:02:24 +0800</pubDate>
			<guid>http://www.bluestrait.com/blog/default.asp?id=213</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[工作间的东西越来越多，堆的一地都是。最后终于决定做一个工具架，以存放各种杂七杂八的工具。<br/><br/>设想是以constructural pine做支架，veneered plywood做隔层，pegboard做背板。<br/><br/>支架以half housing加螺丝的方式固定。<br/>plywood用1/4×3’ 的螺钉加螺帽的方式固定在支架上。<br/>pegboard使用8gx25mm的螺丝固定在支架及plywood上。<br/><br/>用料：<br/>constructural Pine: 90mm*35mm*2400mm x 5&nbsp;&nbsp; $5 ea<br/>veneered plywood: 1800mm*595mm x 3&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;$23 ea<br/>pegboard: 1800mm*1200mm x 1&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;$45 ea<br/><br/>总成本：加上各种peg hooks大约 $150左右。<br/>大小： 1800mm(H) * 1700mm(W) * 600mm(D)<br/>耗时：5小时。<br/><br/>简要过程：<br/><br/>制作housing: <br/><br/>将四根要做为竖的支架的木料固定在一起，画好housing的线，然后将circular saw设定好深度（约为木料的一半厚度）后在要去掉的废料区跑几个来回。这个目的是让随后使用chisel加工housing时更容易：<br/><img src="http://www.bluestrait.com/bluegallery/pictures/2009_08_04_workshop/img_0695_m.jpg" border="0" alt=""/><br/><br/><img src="http://www.bluestrait.com/bluegallery/pictures/2009_08_04_workshop/img_0699_m.jpg" border="0" alt=""/><br/><br/>最后使用chisel将废料去掉：<br/><img src="http://www.bluestrait.com/bluegallery/pictures/2009_08_04_workshop/img_0700_m.jpg" border="0" alt=""/><br/><br/>横版装在housing上的样子：<br/><img src="http://www.bluestrait.com/bluegallery/pictures/2009_08_04_workshop/img_0701_m.jpg" border="0" alt=""/><br/><br/>涂上木工胶后拼好，装上clamp让胶水愈合：<br/><img src="http://www.bluestrait.com/bluegallery/pictures/2009_08_04_workshop/img_0702_m.jpg" border="0" alt=""/><br/><br/>然后钻螺丝导引孔，和countersink:<br/><img src="http://www.bluestrait.com/bluegallery/pictures/2009_08_04_workshop/img_0704_m.jpg" border="0" alt=""/><br/><br/>countersink bit特写:<br/><img src="http://www.bluestrait.com/bluegallery/pictures/2009_08_04_workshop/img_0706_m.jpg" border="0" alt=""/><br/><br/>把plywood的四个角用jigsaw锯成凸形的，以便卡入支架：<br/><img src="http://www.bluestrait.com/bluegallery/pictures/2009_08_04_workshop/img_0703_m.jpg" border="0" alt=""/><br/><br/>完工的架子：<br/><img src="http://www.bluestrait.com/bluegallery/pictures/2009_08_04_workshop/img_0725_m.jpg" border="0" alt=""/><br/><br/>另外一面墙上的pegboard:<br/><img src="http://www.bluestrait.com/bluegallery/pictures/2009_08_04_workshop/img_0727_m.jpg" border="0" alt=""/><br/><br/>后话：<br/>竖架之间没加横梁支撑plywood是因为考虑到以后万一要拆起来容易，另外背板也会加强整个结构。但是如果plywood的横架再长就需要考虑加横梁来支撑plywood，和保证结构的安全性了。]]></description>
		</item>
		
			<item>
			<link>http://www.bluestrait.com/blog/article.asp?id=212</link>
			<title><![CDATA[The sparking produced within the hammer drill]]></title>
			<author>bluestrait@gmail.com(黄敏)</author>
			<category><![CDATA[DIY]]></category>
			<pubDate>Mon,03 Aug 2009 16:46:02 +0800</pubDate>
			<guid>http://www.bluestrait.com/blog/default.asp?id=212</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[According to wiki:<br/><a target="_blank" href="http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hammer_drill" rel="external">http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hammer_drill</a><br/><br/>&#34;The sparking produced by the motor components of most hammer drills is normal.&#34;]]></description>
		</item>
		
			<item>
			<link>http://www.bluestrait.com/blog/article.asp?id=211</link>
			<title><![CDATA[【转贴】A Nest of Crickets-Diagram]]></title>
			<author>bluestrait@gmail.com(黄敏)</author>
			<category><![CDATA[DIY]]></category>
			<pubDate>Sun,02 Aug 2009 15:48:13 +0800</pubDate>
			<guid>http://www.bluestrait.com/blog/default.asp?id=211</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[<div style="clear: left; color: rgb(102, 102, 102); font-family: Trebuchet MS,Arial,Verdana; font-size: 14px; margin-bottom: 10px; text-align: left;">
<p><b>A Nest of Crickets-Diagram</b><br />
Lowboys, stools or crickets&mdash;whatever you call them, these stands are amazingly strong and versatile. There are four separate lengths for the tops and sides for four different-sized lowboys. You can make all four &ldquo;boys&rdquo; out of one sheet of 3/4-in. plywood. The progressively larger sizes allow them to nest for storage, making them perfect for a cramped shop. The 16-in. height is just right for large work that might not fit on normal sawhorses.</p>
</div>
<br />
<div style="overflow: hidden; width: 486px;"><img border="0" src="http://media.rd.com/rd/images/rdc/family-handyman/2001/06/Small-Shop-Storage-12-ss.jpg" alt="Small Workshop Storage Solutions-A Nest of Crickets" title="Small Workshop Storage Solutions-A Nest of Crickets" /></div>
<div id="imageCounterLeft">Image 11 of 11</div>
<!--{12492532224290}-->
<div style="clear: left; color: rgb(102, 102, 102); font-family: Trebuchet MS,Arial,Verdana; font-size: 14px; margin-bottom: 10px; text-align: left;">
<p><b>A Nest of Crickets</b><br />
For working around the house, that extra height makes it easy to reach ceilings. If that&rsquo;s not reason enough, when your buddies come over to help you cogitate the finer points of your next project, there&rsquo;ll be plenty of seating.</p>
</div>
<p>&nbsp;</p>]]></description>
		</item>
		
			<item>
			<link>http://www.bluestrait.com/blog/article.asp?id=200</link>
			<title><![CDATA[做板凳记-5 经验及教训]]></title>
			<author>bluestrait@gmail.com(黄敏)</author>
			<category><![CDATA[DIY]]></category>
			<pubDate>Wed,15 Jul 2009 20:51:36 +0800</pubDate>
			<guid>http://www.bluestrait.com/blog/default.asp?id=200</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[1. 选购时要选好正直，无变形的木材。我的凳面就是买时就有点拱，结果在制作时就造成麻烦，日后使用可能也会有问题。<br/><br/>2. 上漆时要薄，不可一次堆上太多漆，否则容易造成堆积和stream的问题。耐心也很重要，有时一次就上一到两面好了，不可贪快。<br/><br/>To be finished.]]></description>
		</item>
		
			<item>
			<link>http://www.bluestrait.com/blog/article.asp?id=199</link>
			<title><![CDATA[做板凳记-3 拼装和打磨]]></title>
			<author>bluestrait@gmail.com(黄敏)</author>
			<category><![CDATA[DIY]]></category>
			<pubDate>Wed,15 Jul 2009 20:27:40 +0800</pubDate>
			<guid>http://www.bluestrait.com/blog/default.asp?id=199</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[<strong>3.1 基本拼装</strong><br/><br/>可以看到做工很粗糙，吻合度不完美（毕竟是第一次尝试这种连接方式嘛，经验不足），还有毛边：<br/><img src="http://www.bluestrait.com/bluegallery/pictures/2009_07_diy_stool/IMG_0251_m.JPG" border="0" alt=""/><br/><br/><img src="http://www.bluestrait.com/bluegallery/pictures/2009_07_diy_stool/IMG_0249_m.JPG" border="0" alt=""/><br/><br/><strong>3.2 正式拼装</strong><br/>1. 在所有tenon涂上木工胶后将所有部件拼装在一起，然后用G-Clamp夹紧。<br/>2. 将合适大小的碎木料(wedge)沾上木工胶用锤子填入大的空隙，以保证结合部没有松动。<br/>3. 然后用timber fillter填补小的孔和缝。<br/>4. 晾干24个小时以让胶水充分愈合。<br/><br/>涉及工具：<br/>各种Clamps:<br/><img src="http://www.bluestrait.com/bluegallery/pictures/2009_07_diy_stool/IMG_0495_m.jpg" border="0" alt=""/><br/><br/>timber fillter:<br/><img src="http://www.bluestrait.com/bluegallery/pictures/2009_07_diy_stool/IMG_0493_m.jpg" border="0" alt=""/><br/><br/>木工胶：<br/><img src="http://www.bluestrait.com/bluegallery/pictures/2009_07_diy_stool/IMG_0499_m.jpg" border="0" alt=""/><br/><br/><br/>然后就可以打磨了。<br/><br/><strong>3.3 打磨</strong><br/><br/>使用Random o&#114;bital Sander/50 Grit Sand paper， 120Grit, 240Grit, 360Grit 砂纸顺序分别打磨一遍。同时把打磨任何尖锐的可能伤人的部位，包括所有边角，直到用手摸过去都是柔和，光滑的感觉为止。<br/><br/>打磨工具<br/><img src="http://www.bluestrait.com/bluegallery/pictures/2009_07_diy_stool/IMG_0494_m.JPG" border="0" alt=""/><br/><br/>现在板凳看上去是光滑如镜：<br/><img src="http://www.bluestrait.com/bluegallery/pictures/2009_07_diy_stool/IMG_0408_m.JPG" border="0" alt=""/><br/><br/><img src="http://www.bluestrait.com/bluegallery/pictures/2009_07_diy_stool/IMG_0409_m.JPG" border="0" alt=""/><br/><br/><img src="http://www.bluestrait.com/bluegallery/pictures/2009_07_diy_stool/IMG_0412_m.JPG" border="0" alt=""/><br/><br/>下一步，可以上漆了。<br/><br/><a target="_blank" href="http://www.bluestrait.com/blog/article.asp?id=192" rel="external">做板凳记-2 部件制作</a><br/><a target="_blank" href="http://www.bluestrait.com/blog/article.asp?id=194" rel="external">做板凳记-4 上漆</a>]]></description>
		</item>
		
			<item>
			<link>http://www.bluestrait.com/blog/article.asp?id=194</link>
			<title><![CDATA[做板凳记-4 上漆]]></title>
			<author>bluestrait@gmail.com(黄敏)</author>
			<category><![CDATA[DIY]]></category>
			<pubDate>Thu,09 Jul 2009 15:53:27 +0800</pubDate>
			<guid>http://www.bluestrait.com/blog/default.asp?id=194</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[决定使用Satin Varnish做finish。 <br/><br/>使用的工具和原料在下面的照片里：<br/><img src="http://www.bluestrait.com/bluegallery/pictures/2009_07_diy_stool/IMG_0501_m.jpg" border="0" alt=""/><br/><br/>下面是上完第一道漆后的情形。看上去还行，其实挺糟糕。有油漆积累的现象，另外也有stream形成的难看的条纹。<br/><br/><img src="http://www.bluestrait.com/bluegallery/pictures/2009_07_diy_stool/IMG_0420_m.JPG" border="0" alt=""/><br/><br/><img src="http://www.bluestrait.com/bluegallery/pictures/2009_07_diy_stool/IMG_0424_m.JPG" border="0" alt=""/><br/><br/><img src="http://www.bluestrait.com/bluegallery/pictures/2009_07_diy_stool/IMG_0439_m.JPG" border="0" alt=""/><br/><br/><img src="http://www.bluestrait.com/bluegallery/pictures/2009_07_diy_stool/IMG_0445_m.JPG" border="0" alt=""/><br/><br/><img src="http://www.bluestrait.com/bluegallery/pictures/2009_07_diy_stool/IMG_0446_m.JPG" border="0" alt=""/><br/><br/>上完第一遍油漆后等了两天，然后用360砂纸再打磨一遍，又上了一道漆，然后就此收工。<br/><br/>最终上漆效果：<br/>1. 远看很好，大部分位置都很光滑，有镜面效果。同时，虽然varnish理论上来说是透明的，但是上完两遍后木材的颜色纹路还是被染深了很多，看起来效果不错。<br/><br/>2. 但是近看就可以看到有stream的痕迹，板凳背面还有油漆积累形成的球滴的现象，很多地方仔细看还可以看到有灰尘颗粒气泡等等形成的小突起。<br/><br/>总而言之，不甚令人满意，只能给60分。下次再吸取教训改进吧。<br/><br/>最后结果的照片：<br/><br/><img src="http://www.bluestrait.com/bluegallery/pictures/2009_07_diy_stool/IMG_0487_m.JPG" border="0" alt=""/><br/><br/><img src="http://www.bluestrait.com/bluegallery/pictures/2009_07_diy_stool/IMG_0488_m.JPG" border="0" alt=""/><br/><br/><img src="http://www.bluestrait.com/bluegallery/pictures/2009_07_diy_stool/IMG_0491_m.JPG" border="0" alt=""/><br/><br/><img src="http://www.bluestrait.com/bluegallery/pictures/2009_07_diy_stool/IMG_0511_m.JPG" border="0" alt=""/><br/><br/><img src="http://www.bluestrait.com/bluegallery/pictures/2009_07_diy_stool/IMG_0548_m.JPG" border="0" alt=""/><br/><br/>很多人问为什凳面中间有那道孔，也许这张照片可以帮助解释一下：<br/><img src="http://www.bluestrait.com/bluegallery/pictures/2009_07_diy_stool/IMG_0504_m.JPG" border="0" alt=""/><br/><br/><br/><a target="_blank" href="http://www.bluestrait.com/blog/article.asp?id=199" rel="external">做板凳记-3 拼装和打磨</a><br/><a target="_blank" href="http://www.bluestrait.com/blog/article.asp?id=200" rel="external">做板凳记-5 经验及教训</a>]]></description>
		</item>
		
			<item>
			<link>http://www.bluestrait.com/blog/article.asp?id=193</link>
			<title><![CDATA[做板凳记-题外篇1 工具]]></title>
			<author>bluestrait@gmail.com(黄敏)</author>
			<category><![CDATA[DIY]]></category>
			<pubDate>Thu,09 Jul 2009 15:52:12 +0800</pubDate>
			<guid>http://www.bluestrait.com/blog/default.asp?id=193</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[<strong>工具1：</strong><br/><img src="http://www.bluestrait.com/bluegallery/pictures/2009_07_diy_stool/IMG_0237_m.JPG" border="0" alt=""/><br/><br/><strong>工具2：</strong><br/><img src="http://www.bluestrait.com/bluegallery/pictures/2009_07_diy_stool/IMG_0242_m.JPG" border="0" alt=""/><br/><br/><strong>Workshop</strong> (Messy!):<br/><img src="http://www.bluestrait.com/bluegallery/pictures/2009_07_diy_stool/IMG_0240_m.JPG" border="0" alt=""/><br/><br/>具体解释待填。]]></description>
		</item>
		
			<item>
			<link>http://www.bluestrait.com/blog/article.asp?id=192</link>
			<title><![CDATA[做板凳记-2 部件制作]]></title>
			<author>bluestrait@gmail.com(黄敏)</author>
			<category><![CDATA[DIY]]></category>
			<pubDate>Thu,09 Jul 2009 15:42:30 +0800</pubDate>
			<guid>http://www.bluestrait.com/blog/default.asp?id=192</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[想做这样一个板凳是因为家里厨房的橱柜有些比较高，家人经常需要有个小凳子帮忙。而小朋友上马桶也还需要小凳子爬上去。此外跟小朋友玩时小板凳也很合用。所以要求是要轻而结实。此前所作的板凳版本2实在太重，所以决定重新再做一个。这次只用松木pine，图的是便宜轻便。<br/><br/><strong>1. 设计Plan</strong><br/>于是在网上找到这个原始设计Plan：<br/><a target="_blank" href="http://www.buildeazy.com/newserve/step-stool-1.html" rel="external">http://www.buildeazy.com/newserve/step-stool-1.html</a><br/>和原始作品图片：<br/><img src="http://www.buildeazy.com/newserve/step-stool.gif" border="0" alt=""/><br/><br/>在此Plan基础上的改动之处：<br/>1. 去掉了附加的小板凳<br/>2. 不使用任何螺丝和钉子，改用tenon+mortise拼装<br/>3. 在板凳面上开一条扁的缝，以方便单手携带和提高美观度。<br/><br/><strong>2. 建造过程：</strong><br/><br/><strong>2.1 凳腿上的弧线</strong><br/>首先使用circular saw在原始木板上切出所需的大小：凳腿 x 2, 噔面 x 1, 凳腿连接件 x 2。<br/><img src="http://www.bluestrait.com/bluegallery/pictures/2009_07_diy_stool/IMG_0243_m.JPG" border="0" alt=""/><br/><br/><strong>2.2 凳腿上的弧线</strong><br/>在用一个盘子做模板在凳脚上画出弧边后，使用Jigsaw切割出凳脚上的拱形。<br/><img src="http://www.bluestrait.com/bluegallery/pictures/2009_07_diy_stool/IMG_0221_m.JPG" border="0" alt=""/><br/><br/><strong>2.3 板凳面上的开口</strong><br/>使用电钻加spade bit开好两端的20mm直径的洞之后，再使用jigsaw将两个洞连接起来就成了。<br/><br/><strong>2.4 Mortise的制作</strong><br/>在凳脚上画好要开用以连接侧面连板的mortise的位置：<br/><img src="http://www.bluestrait.com/bluegallery/pictures/2009_07_diy_stool/IMG_0222_m.JPG" border="0" alt=""/><br/><br/>用电钻尽量将要开mortise的位置的木料去掉，以节省使用chisel开mortise的功夫。<br/><img src="http://www.bluestrait.com/bluegallery/pictures/2009_07_diy_stool/IMG_0223_m.JPG" border="0" alt=""/><br/><br/>最后在三样工具：电钻，jigsaw, 和chisel的帮助下开出的mortise：<br/><img src="http://www.bluestrait.com/bluegallery/pictures/2009_07_diy_stool/IMG_0225_m.JPG" border="0" alt=""/><br/><br/><strong>2.5 tenon的制作</strong><br/>画好为做侧面连板的tenon而要去掉的废料位置：<br/><img src="http://www.bluestrait.com/bluegallery/pictures/2009_07_diy_stool/IMG_0226_m.JPG" border="0" alt=""/><br/><br/>然后使用jigsaw和chisel作出的侧面连板的tenon：<br/><img src="http://www.bluestrait.com/bluegallery/pictures/2009_07_diy_stool/IMG_0228_m.JPG" border="0" alt=""/><br/><br/>开始制作凳腿与凳面连接的tenon。这个比侧面连板的复杂，因为要做四面。<br/>使用手锯（tenon saw)先大致切割：<br/><img src="http://www.bluestrait.com/bluegallery/pictures/2009_07_diy_stool/IMG_0245_m.JPG" border="0" alt=""/><br/><br/>使用jigsaw去掉了中部的废料。<br/><img src="http://www.bluestrait.com/bluegallery/pictures/2009_07_diy_stool/IMG_0247_m.JPG" border="0" alt=""/><br/><br/>再用手锯进一步微调。<br/><img src="http://www.bluestrait.com/bluegallery/pictures/2009_07_diy_stool/IMG_0244_m.JPG" border="0" alt=""/><br/><br/>最后用chisel完工。<br/><img src="http://www.bluestrait.com/bluegallery/pictures/2009_07_diy_stool/IMG_0232_m.JPG" border="0" alt=""/><br/><br/>Chisel:<br/><img src="http://www.bluestrait.com/bluegallery/pictures/2009_07_diy_stool/IMG_0497_m.JPG" border="0" alt=""/><br/><br/><a target="_blank" href="http://www.bluestrait.com/blog/article.asp?id=191" rel="external">做板凳记-1 板凳之进化史</a><br/><a target="_blank" href="http://www.bluestrait.com/blog/article.asp?id=199" rel="external">做板凳记-3 拼装和打磨</a><br/>]]></description>
		</item>
		
			<item>
			<link>http://www.bluestrait.com/blog/article.asp?id=191</link>
			<title><![CDATA[做板凳记-1 板凳之进化史]]></title>
			<author>bluestrait@gmail.com(黄敏)</author>
			<category><![CDATA[DIY]]></category>
			<pubDate>Thu,09 Jul 2009 03:30:42 +0800</pubDate>
			<guid>http://www.bluestrait.com/blog/default.asp?id=191</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[在我的刚起步的DIY木工生涯中，已经总共做了三个板凳。奇怪，难道我特别喜欢板凳？<br/><br/>三个在一起：<br/><img src="http://www.bluestrait.com/bluegallery/pictures/2009_07_diy_stool/IMG_0483_m.jpg" border="0" alt=""/><br/><br/><img src="http://www.bluestrait.com/bluegallery/pictures/2009_07_diy_stool/IMG_0484_m.jpg" border="0" alt=""/><br/><br/><strong>第一个：刀耕火种版</strong><br/>用料：后面盖房子的人剩下的四块废料。<br/>固定方式：螺钉。<br/>使用工具：电钻<br/>建造时间：2006<br/>使用寿命：六个月<br/><img src="http://www.bluestrait.com/blog/attachments/month_0907/x20097932925.jpg" border="0" alt=""/><br/><br/><strong>第二个：乡村田园版</strong><br/>用料：凳腿买的木料，加后面盖房子的人剩下的deck board. <br/>固定方式：螺丝螺帽。<br/>建造时间：2007<br/>使用工具：电钻，Mitre Saw, G-Glamp<br/>使用寿命：至今没有要衰败的迹象。不过用于用料太粗，板凳极重，没人愿意动它。也难怪，原型设计是作为Garden Bench来的。<br/><img src="http://www.bluestrait.com/blog/attachments/month_0907/m20097932813.jpg" border="0" alt=""/><br/><br/><strong>第三个（工业革命版）</strong><br/>用料：全部买的pine, Varnish<br/>固定方式：tenon+mortise, 木工胶。<br/>建造时间：2009.7<br/>使用工具：电钻，Mitre Saw, Chisel, circular saw, Mortise Guage, Try Square, Jig Saw, Power Sander, Sand Paper, G-Clamp, C-Clamp<br/>使用寿命：倒数计时中。<br/><br/><img src="http://www.bluestrait.com/bluegallery/pictures/2009_07_diy_stool/IMG_0511_m.jpg" border="0" alt=""/><br/><br/>下面聊聊这第三个板凳的建造过程，以及经验教训。<br/><br/>注：由于在国内从来没玩过木工，所以很多术语，包括工具都不知道中文名，只能使用英文，请见谅。不过这样也有好处，各位有兴趣的朋友也就可以知道该在hardware store里寻找什么了。<br/><br/><a target="_blank" href="http://www.bluestrait.com/blog/article.asp?id=192" rel="external">做板凳记-2 部件制作</a>]]></description>
		</item>
		
			<item>
			<link>http://www.bluestrait.com/blog/article.asp?id=190</link>
			<title><![CDATA[贴瓷砖]]></title>
			<author>bluestrait@gmail.com(黄敏)</author>
			<category><![CDATA[DIY]]></category>
			<pubDate>Wed,08 Jul 2009 23:27:32 +0800</pubDate>
			<guid>http://www.bluestrait.com/blog/default.asp?id=190</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[生平第一次正儿八经地贴瓷砖。主要是把厨房柜子的边角贴上。<br/><br/>花费：$100，工具加胶水。瓷砖是捡来的，grout是朋友处拿来的。<br/><br/>抹上adhesive:<br/><img src="http://www.bluestrait.com/bluegallery/pictures/2009_07_diy_stool/IMG_0215_m.JPG" border="0" alt=""/><br/><br/>贴上瓷砖：<br/><img src="http://www.bluestrait.com/bluegallery/pictures/2009_07_diy_stool/IMG_0216_m.JPG" border="0" alt=""/><br/><br/>切瓷砖：<br/><img src="http://www.bluestrait.com/bluegallery/pictures/2009_07_diy_stool/IMG_0217_m.JPG" border="0" alt=""/><br/><br/>贴瓷砖时用的工具：<br/><img src="http://www.bluestrait.com/bluegallery/pictures/2009_07_diy_stool/IMG_0218_m.JPG" border="0" alt=""/><br/><br/>填grout时用的工具：<br/><img src="http://www.bluestrait.com/bluegallery/pictures/2009_07_diy_stool/IMG_0224_m.JPG" border="0" alt=""/><br/>]]></description>
		</item>
		
			<item>
			<link>http://www.bluestrait.com/blog/article.asp?id=189</link>
			<title><![CDATA[[转贴] How to Stain/Sand Wooden Furniture]]></title>
			<author>bluestrait@gmail.com(黄敏)</author>
			<category><![CDATA[DIY]]></category>
			<pubDate>Wed,08 Jul 2009 19:03:46 +0800</pubDate>
			<guid>http://www.bluestrait.com/blog/default.asp?id=189</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[<div class="head">
<div class="title">
<h1><span class="articleTitle">How to Stain/Sand Wooden Furniture</span></h1>
<p class="articleByLine">by <a href="http://www.howstuffworks.com/how-to-stain-wooden-furniture.htm/hsw-contact.htm" jquery1247104960566="33">the Editors of Consumer Guide</a></p>
</div>
<div class="pageToolsReturn">Browse the article <b><a href="http://www.howstuffworks.com/how-to-stain-wooden-furniture.htm" jquery1247104960566="34">How to Stain Wooden Furniture</a></b></div>
</div>
<div class="articleBody">
<p class="printableTocItem">Introduction to Staining Wooden Furniture</p>
<font size="2"><span style="font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif">Staining wooden furniture isn't just a matter of </span><a href="http://home.howstuffworks.com/how-to-strip-wooden-furniture.htm" target="_self" jquery1247104960566="35" style="font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif">stripping</a></font><font size="2"><span style="font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif"> off one finish and applying another. Preparing the wood takes both time and elbow grease, but it's vital to the success of your refinishing job. The finish is only as good as the preparation for it. You may end up spending more time on this step than you did on of the other furniture refinishing stages, but your results will be worth the effort.<br />
<br />
Staining wooden furniture can be a big job, filled with the apprehension that you might ruin the piece. Hopefully, this article can give you peace of mind. In the following sections, we wiil walk you through the entire staining process -- bleaching, sanding, staining, and sealing. Let's get started with some questions you'll have to ask yourself before you begin staining.<br />
<br />
First, take a good look at the piece of furniture. How has the stripping process affected it? Are the joints loose? Do burns, stains, or other blemishes still show? Are veneers loose or bubbled? Before you prepare and stain the wood, repair the damage. Any problems you ignore now will show up all too clearly later; the finish will accentuate the damage.</span></font><br />
<p>&nbsp;</p>
<table cellspacing="0" cellpadding="3" align="center">
    <tbody>
        <tr>
            <td><center><img border="0" alt="After stripping, examine the piece of furniture for surface and structural problems &ndash;- burns, stains, cracks, loose veneer. " src="http://static.howstuffworks.com/gif/how-to-stain-wooden-furniture-99.jpg" width="400" height="301" /><font size="-2"><br />
            &copy;2006 Publications International, Ltd.<br />
            <strong>After stripping, examine the piece of furniture for surface and structural <br />
            problems &ndash;- burns, stains, cracks, loose veneer. </strong></font><br />
            </center></td>
        </tr>
    </tbody>
</table>
<p>&nbsp;</p>
<font size="2"><span style="font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif">Second, look at the wood itself. What kind of wood is it? Is the grain open or closed? The type of wood determines the preparation -- open-grained woods should usually be filled; some woods may need special treatment. Is the piece of furniture made with more than one kind of wood? If it is, you may have to bleach or stain the less conspicuous wood -- usually the less expensive one--so that it matches the main surfaces.<br />
<div id="googleAd">&nbsp;</div>
<br />
Finally, look at the color and texture of the stripped wood. Is there an old stain or filler left in the wood? It should usually be bleached out. Is the color blotchy or uneven? Is one part of the furniture darker than another? Is the wood darker or lighter than you want it to be? Can you see a distinct grain pattern? <br />
<br />
With any piece of furniture, the stain you choose will determine how the wood should be prepared. Not all finishes can be used with all sealers and fillers. Not all stains require the same amount of preparation. Before you prepare a piece of furniture for staining, make sure you're familiar with the special characteristics and requirements of the stain you plan to use. Read the ingredient and application information on the container, and follow the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Make sure you use compatible sealers and fillers as specified by the manufacturer and as outlined in the accompanying chart.<br />
<br />
Think you're ready to begin? Well, before you can start staining or even sanding, you might have to do something about discolorations in the wood's surface. In the next section, you will learn the various techniques for bleaching wood.<br />
</span></font>
<p class="printableTocItem">How to Bleach Wooden Furniture</p>
<span class="articleBody"><span class="articleBody"><font size="2" style="font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif">In most cases, bleaching is essentially a first-aid measure, not a routine part of refinishing. A piece of furniture should be bleached if the surface is marked by stains, black rings, or water spots; if the wood is discolored or blotchy; if the color is uneven; or if an old stain or filler is left after the finish is removed. Old filler is often a problem with oak, walnut, and mahogany. Bleaching can also be used to even the color of a piece of furniture made with two or more woods. It can lighten the darker wood to match the lighter one. <br />
<br />
Before you use bleach on any piece of furniture, make sure the wood is suitable for bleaching. Some woods don't accept bleach well -- cherry and satinwood, for instance, should never be bleached. Some woods, such as bass, cedar, chestnut, elm, redwood, and rosewood, are very difficult to bleach, and some -- notably pine and poplar -- are so light that bleaching makes them look lifeless. Birch, maple, and walnut can be bleached, but bleaching destroys their distinctive color. And the rare woods -- mahogany, teak, and the other choice woods -- seldom benefit from bleaching. Common woods that are easy to bleach, and may benefit from it, include ash, beech, gum, and oak. <br />
<br />
<span style="font-weight: bold">Choosing a Bleach <br />
<br />
</span>Not all bleaching jobs call for the same type of bleach. Depending on the problem you want to correct, you may need a very strong bleaching agent or a relatively mild one. Below are some common bleach options you might want to consider.<br style="font-weight: bold" />
<br />
</font><font size="2" style="font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif"><span style="font-weight: bold">Laundry Bleach</span>: This mild bleach can solve most refinishing color problems, from stain or filler not removed in stripping to ink stains and water spots. It works well for blotchy areas and for slight overall lightening, but it won't change the color of the wood drastically. Before you use a stronger bleach on any piece of furniture, try laundry bleach; it usually does the trick. <br />
<br />
</font><font size="2"><span style="font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif"><span style="font-weight: bold">Oxalic Acid</span>: Oxalic acid, sold in powder or crystal form, is used to remove black water marks from wood. It is also effective in restoring chemically darkened wood to its natural color. You're not likely to encounter this problem unless you have a piece of furniture commercially stripped because lye and ammonia, the chemicals that discolor wood, are not recommended for nonprofessional use. </span></font><font size="2" style="font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif">Oxalic acid must be used on the entire surface of the wood, because in most cases it also bleaches out old stain. You may have to bleach the entire piece of furniture to get an even color. Oxalic acid is more effective in lightening open-grained wood than close-grained. <br />
<br />
<span style="font-weight: bold">Two-Part Bleaches</span>: The two-part commercial wood bleaches are used to lighten or remove the natural color of wood. If you want a dark old piece to fit in with a roomful of blond furniture, this is the bleach to use. Two-part bleach is very strong and must be used carefully; wear rubber gloves and safety goggles. This type of bleach is also expensive. Several brands are available.<br />
<br />
</font></span><font size="2" style="font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif"><span style="font-weight: bold">Bleaching Techniques</span><br />
<br />
Whatever bleach you use, remember that the results are permanent -- you may be able to restain if you make the wood too light, but uneven bleaching is very hard to remedy. Make sure the wood is absolutely clean, and touch it as little as possible. The bleach must penetrate the wood evenly. <br />
Before applying the bleach, test it on a scrap piece of the same wood or on a hidden part of the piece of furniture. Make sure you know exactly what the bleach will do and how fast. In general, bleaches act quickly on soft woods and slowly on hard woods. <br />
<br />
Bleaching isn't difficult, but it does require some precautions -- bleaches are fairly strong chemicals. The stronger ones can damage skin, eyes, and lungs. Wear rubber gloves and safety goggles when working with bleach, and make sure your working area is well ventilated. Follow the bleach manufacturer's instructions exactly. If you get bleach on your skin, wash it off immediately. <br />
<br />
Bleaching also requires careful application and removal. With any bleach, use a synthetic-bristle brush -- the chemicals will damage natural bristles. Apply the bleach along the grain of the wood, wetting the surface evenly and thoroughly; there should be no dry spots and no puddles. Let the bleach work as detailed below. <br />
<br />
After bleaching, wipe the wood clean with a damp cloth. To remove any residue, neutralize the wood thoroughly; use an ammonia solution for oxalic acid, a borax solution for laundry bleach or two-part bleaches. Wash the bleached wood thoroughly with the appropriate neutralizer; be careful not to overwet it. Then, working quickly to prevent water damage, rinse the wood with clean water and dry it thoroughly with a soft cloth. Let the piece of furniture dry for at least two days before doing any further work on it. <br />
<br />
</font>
<p>&nbsp;</p>
<table cellspacing="0" cellpadding="3" align="center">
    <tbody>
        <tr>
            <td><center><img border="0" alt="Laundry bleach can be used to lighten blotchy areas of wood." src="http://static.howstuffworks.com/gif/how-to-bleach-wooden-furniture-1.jpg" width="400" height="292" /><font size="-2"><br />
            &copy; 2006 Publications International<br />
            <strong>To even blotchy areas and to lighten the wood slightly overall, apply <br />
            laundry bleach full-strength along the grain of the wood over the entire surface. </strong></font></center></td>
        </tr>
    </tbody>
</table>
<p>&nbsp;</p>
<font size="2" style="font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif"><span style="font-weight: bold">Laundry Bleach<br />
<br />
</span>Apply laundry bleach full-strength, brushing it evenly over the entire surface. If you're removing spots or lightening discolored areas, apply bleach full-strength to those areas. Laundry bleach works quickly. After a minute or two, you should be able to see the stain fading. If you're bleaching out an old stain, wipe the bleach off with a damp cloth when the stain has lightened.<br />
<br />
If you're spot-bleaching to remove spots or blend color areas, wait until the bleached spots are roughly the same color as the rest of the wood; then apply bleach again over the entire surface. Remove the bleach with a damp cloth when the color is even. Finally, neutralize the treated wood with a solution of 1 cup of borax dissolved in 1 quart of hot water. Neutralize, rinse with clean water, and dry it thoroughly.<br />
<span style="font-weight: bold"><br />
Oxalic Acid</span><br />
<br />
Oxalic acid is not caustic, but it is poisonous. Wear rubber gloves and safety goggles, and make sure ventilation is adequate. To prepare the acid, mix a saturated solution with warm water: 1 ounce of powder or crystals per 1 cup of warm water. Make sure you prepare enough bleach to treat the entire surface or piece of furniture.<br />
<br />
Apply the acid solution evenly to the wood, brushing it on along the grain to cover the entire surface. On soft wood, you'll see results very quickly; on hard woods the bleaching takes longer. Let the acid work for about 20 minutes, then wipe it off with a damp cloth. If the surface isn't fully or evenly bleached, reapply the acid as necessary. On hard woods, complete bleaching may take up to an hour. Wipe the wood clean with a damp cloth, and wash it with clean water. Then neutralize it with a solution of 1 cup of household ammonia and 2 quarts of water. Rinse it again with clean water, and dry it thoroughly.<span style="font-weight: bold"><br />
<br />
Two-Part Bleaches<br />
<br />
</span>Two-part bleach is easy to use, and usually works very quickly. The two components of the bleach -- labeled &quot;1&quot; and &quot;2&quot; or &quot;A&quot; and &quot;B&quot; -- are usually applied separately. Read the manufacturer's instructions and follow them exactly. The first solution is usually allowed to work for about 20 minutes before the second solution is applied.<br />
<br />
Following the directions carefully, apply the first solution and let it work; then apply the second solution. One treatment usually bleaches the wood completely, but if the wood isn't light enough, treat it again. Wipe the bleached wood clean with a damp cloth, and then neutralize it with a solution of 1 cup of borax dissolved in 1 quart of hot water. Rinse the wood with clean water, and dry it thoroughly.<span style="font-weight: bold"><br />
<br />
Post-Bleach Treatment </span><br />
<br />
Treatment with any bleach raises the grain of the wood, even when the piece of furniture has already been thoroughly sanded. To prevent the raised grain from affecting the finish, it must be resanded to the level of the wood surface after the wood is dry. <br />
<br />
After bleaching, let the piece of furniture dry for at least two days. Then sand the grain down lightly with grade 5/0 or 6/0 sandpaper; be careful not to roughen the surface. Because there may still be some chemical residue in the wood, wear a breathing mask and use a vacuum to remove sanding dust. Wipe the wood clean with a tack cloth. <br />
<br />
One other complication of bleaching, especially with laundry bleach, is that the wood may be left with a whitish or grayish color. This is not serious; it indicates that the bleach has dried out the fibers of the wood surface. On hard woods, it disappears when the finish is applied. On soft woods, the gray color may be pronounced and the loose fibers obvious. To remove them, rub the wood firmly along the grain with No. 000 steel wool; rub the entire bleached area, and make sure the color is even. The grayish cast will disappear completely when the finish is applied.<br />
<br />
You're almost ready to start staining your furniture, but there's one more crucial step. Before you can apply any sort of finish to wood, you have to prepare the surface by sanding it down. In the next section, you will learn all about sanding, including how to get into those tricky, tight spaces.<br />
</font></span>
<p class="printableTocItem">How to Sand Wooden Furniture</p>
<span class="articleBody"><font size="2"><span style="font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif">Sanding, more than any other part of refinishing, is a process that can't be rushed. It must be done by hand; power tools can damage the wood. It must be done carefully and thoroughly and always with the grain. But it's a demanding technique only in terms of time, because what it requires is chiefly patience. The care you put into sanding will determine the quality of the finish. Before you begin the work, make sure you know the basics.</span></font></span><br style="font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif" />
<font size="2"><br />
</font><font size="2"><span style="font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif; font-weight: bold">Sanding Technique <br />
<br />
</span></font><font size="2"><span style="font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif"><span style="font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif">The first rule of sanding is to work with the grain of the wood, because cross-grain sanding can leave permanent and very obvious scratches. The second rule is to use a sanding block, because you can't exert even sanding pressure without one. </span></span></font><br />
<table cellspacing="0" cellpadding="3" align="right">
    <tbody>
        <tr>
            <td><center><img border="0" alt="Always sand with the grain of the wood, making long, light even strokes." src="http://static.howstuffworks.com/gif/how-to-sand-wooden-furniture-1.jpg" width="200" height="193" /><font size="-2"><br />
            &copy; 2006 Publications International, Ltd.<br />
            <strong>Always sand with the grain of the <br />
            wood, making long, light, even<br />
            strokes with a padded sanding block.</strong></font><br />
            </center></td>
        </tr>
    </tbody>
</table>
<p><font size="2"><span style="font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif">For flat surfaces, the block should be padded; an unpadded block has no give, and grit caught under the sandpaper can scratch the wood as you work. For curved surfaces, your best bet is a thick piece of foam padding or sponge covered with sandpaper. The padding shapes itself to the curves, providing firm, even pressure. </span><br style="font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif" />
<span style="font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif"><br />
Good sanding technique is easy to learn and apply. Using a sanding block, sand in long, light, even strokes along the grain of the wood. Don't press hard; too much pressure can cause gouging at the edge of the sanding block. Change the sandpaper as soon as it clogs or wears smooth. </span><br style="font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif" />
<span style="font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif"><br />
To smooth the wood evenly and thoroughly, work with successively finer grades of sandpaper. The slight roughness left by the first sanding will be removed in the next sanding; the final sanding will remove the last traces of roughness. Start sanding with coarse-grit paper -- grade 3/0 for most woods or grade 4/0 for very soft woods, such as pine or poplar. Work up to grades 4/0, 5/0, and finally 6/0 sandpaper. Although finer-grit paper would theoretically produce a smoother surface, sanding with too fine a paper can clog the wood and interfere with finishing. </span><br style="font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif" />
<span style="font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif"><br />
Sand the entire piece of furniture with each grade of sandpaper before moving on to the next grade. Between sandings, brush off or vacuum up all sanding debris, and then wipe the wood clean with a tack cloth. Dust or grit caught under the paper can scratch the wood. If there are tight corners you can't get at with sandpaper, use a very sharp scraper to very carefully smooth the wood in these. Scrapers can leave gouges or scratches, so use them only when sanding isn't possible. </span><br style="font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif" />
<br style="font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif" />
<span style="font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif"><span style="font-weight: bold">Rungs, Rounds, and Spindles.</span> <br />
</span></font></p>
<p><font size="2"><span style="font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif">Narrow rungs, spindles, legs, and other round parts need special treatment. Hard sanding with coarse-grit paper, with or without a block, can flatten or deform round parts; only the minimum of wood should be removed. To sand round parts, cut narrow strips of fine-grit -- grades 5/0 and 6/0 -- sandpaper; don't use coarser grades at all. </span><br style="font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif" />
<br style="font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif" />
<span style="font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif">Wrap a strip of sandpaper around the part, crosswise, and pull the ends back and forth to buff-sand the wood. Move up and down each round, changing your angle of sanding as you work to smooth the wood evenly. Be careful not to leave horizontal grooves in the wood at the edges of the sandpaper strips.</span></font></p>
<span style="font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif">
<p>
<p>&nbsp;</p>
<font size="2"><font size="2"><span style="font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif">Finally, you're ready to start staining, right? Not so fast. There's a great deal to know about stains before you start painting one on. In the next section, we'll help you choose the right stain for your wood.</span></font><br />
</font></p>
<p>
<p>&nbsp;</p>
<font size="2"><font size="2"><span style="font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif"><span style="font-weight: bold">Carvings</span><br />
<br />
Carvings, especially shallow ones, must be treated carefully. Because coarse sanding could blur the lines of the carving, use only fine-grit sandpaper, grades 5/0 and 6/0, to smooth the stripped wood; work without a sanding block. Sand lightly along the grain of the wood, pressing the paper into cutout areas with your fingertips. Sand as far down into the carving as you can, but be careful not to flatten rounded surfaces. <br />
<br />
<span style="font-weight: bold">Crevices and Curved Edges</span><br />
<br />
Sand along crevices with a strip of sandpaper creased to fit into the angle of the crevice. Sand only along the crevice, and use slow strokes; keep the pressure even. <br />
<br />
</span></font><font size="2"><span style="font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif">Make sure the sandpaper doesn't slip. If you're not careful, you could damage the edges of the wood at the sides of the crevice. Sand convex curves carefully along the curve, pressing lightly with your fingers and being careful not to damage any adjoining surfaces or edges. To smooth concave curves, use a piece of dowel the same diameter as the curve. Wrap a piece of sandpaper around the dowel, and push it carefully back and forth along the curve. At the ends of the curve, be careful not to slam the dowel into any adjoining surfaces. <br />
<br />
<span style="font-weight: bold">Veneers and Fine Patinas</span><br />
<br />
If the piece of furniture you're working on is veneered, it must be treated very carefully. The usual sanding techniques could cause serious damage to the wood. The same thing is true for wood with a fine patina -- normal sanding will remove the patina. For the best results, veneers and pieces with a fine patina should be smoothed very gently. </span></font><br />
</font>
<p>
<p>&nbsp;</p>
<font size="2"><font size="2"><span style="font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif">Smooth sturdy whole-surface veneers with fine-grit sandpaper, grades 5/0 and 6/0. Do not use coarser grades. On very thin veneers and wood with a patina, smoothing is best done with steel wool. The technique is essentially the same as for sanding; all you really need is patience. <br />
<br />
Start working with No. 0 steel wool if the surface is rough, and work up to Nos. 00 and 000 for the final smoothing. If the surface is smooth, use only the finer grades of steel wool. Between grades, brush off or vacuum up all dust and steel wool debris, and then wipe the wood clean with a tack cloth. <br />
<br style="font-weight: bold" />
<span style="font-weight: bold">Raising the Grain</span><br />
<br />
When wood is moistened, the cells that make up the grain swell, raising the grain above the surface of the wood. Any liquid causes this reaction; even when the wood is smoothly sanded, the finish itself acts to raise the grain. To prevent the appearance of a raised grain in the finished piece of furniture, the grain should be purposely raised and then sanded down before the finish is applied after the final sanding. <br />
<br />
The simplest grain-raiser is water. Sponge the sanded piece of furniture with cold water, soaking the wood evenly and thoroughly; then wipe off any excess. The wood must be evenly wet, with no dry spots and no puddles, or it may dry with water stains. Be especially careful not to overwet veneers; the glue that holds them may be water-soluble. <br />
<br />
Let the wood dry completely. When it's thoroughly dry, the raised fibers of the grain will stick up stiffly above the surface. With grade 5/0 or 6/0 sandpaper, lightly smooth these raised fibers down to the surface of the wood; use No. 000 steel wool on very delicate surfaces. Be careful not to roughen the surface. Then brush off or vacuum up the sanding debris, and wipe the wood clean with a tack cloth. </span></font></font></p>
<table cellspacing="0" cellpadding="3" align="right">
    <tbody>
        <tr>
            <td><center><img border="0" alt="To sand a concave curve, use a piece of dowel, the same diameter as the curve, wrapped in sandpaper." src="http://static.howstuffworks.com/gif/how-to-sand-wooden-furniture-4.jpg" width="200" height="188" /><font size="-2"><br />
            &copy; 2006 Publications International, Ltd.<br />
            <strong>To sand a concave curve, use a<br />
            piece of dowel, the same diameter<br />
            as the curve, wrapped in sandpaper.</strong></font><br />
            </center></td>
        </tr>
    </tbody>
</table>
</p>
<table cellspacing="0" cellpadding="3" align="right">
    <tbody>
        <tr>
            <td><center><img border="0" alt="On carvings, sand lightly along the grain, pressing the sandpaper into the carving. Don't flatten the wood." src="http://static.howstuffworks.com/gif/how-to-sand-wooden-furniture-3.jpg" width="200" height="253" /><font size="-2"><br />
            &copy; 2006 Publications International, Ltd.<br />
            <strong>On carvings, sand lightly along the <br />
            grain, pressing the sandpaper into<br />
            the carving. Be careful not<br />
            to flatten the wood.</strong></font><br />
            </center></td>
        </tr>
    </tbody>
</table>
</span>
<p class="printableTocItem">How to Choose a Stain</p>
<span class="articleBody"><font size="2"><span style="font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif">Wood is a beautiful material, but not all wood is equally beautiful. The choice woods are prized chiefly for the beauty of their color and grain; the common furniture woods are less desirable not because they don't work as well but because they don't look as nice. Antiques, whether hardwood or softwood, are often beautiful simply because the wood has acquired a patina that new wood doesn't have. In furniture refinishing, one great equalizer is used to make the wood look better: stain.</span><br style="font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif" />
<span style="font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif"><br />
Staining is done for a variety of reasons. Properly used, stain can emphasize the wood grain and give a light wood character. It can make a new wood look old or a common wood look like a rare one. It can pull together a two-wood piece, restore color to bleached areas and change or deepen the color of any wood. Staining is not always advisable, but it can solve a lot of problems. </span><span style="font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif"><br />
<br />
Before you stain any piece of furniture, take a good look at it. If it's made of cherry, maple, mahogany, rosewood, aged pine, or any of the rare woods, the wood should probably not be stained; these woods look best in their natural color. If the wood is light, with a relatively undistinguished grain, it may benefit considerably from a stain. Beech, birch, poplar, ash, gum, and new pine are usually stained before finishing. Some woods, like oak, are attractive either stained or unstained. In general, it's better not to stain if you're not sure it would improve the wood.</span><span style="font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif"><br />
</span></font>
<p>&nbsp;</p>
<table cellspacing="0" cellpadding="3" align="center">
    <tbody>
        <tr>
            <td><center><img border="0" alt="Stain an inconpicuous area to see how the finished wood looks stained." src="http://static.howstuffworks.com/gif/how-to-stain-wooden-furniture-1.jpg" width="400" height="502" /><font size="-2"><br />
            &copy; 2006 Publications International<br />
            <strong>Before staining a piece of furniture, brush a little finish on an inconspicuous <br />
            area to see how the finished wood looks without a stain. </strong></font><br />
            </center></td>
        </tr>
    </tbody>
</table>
<p>&nbsp;</p>
<font size="2"><span style="font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif">The type of wood is not the only guideline for staining; your own preference should be the deciding factor. To get an idea how the piece of furniture would look unstained, test an inconspicuous spot -- on the bottom of a table, for example -- with whatever finish you plan to apply. The finish itself will darken the wood and bring out the grain. If you like the way it looks, there's no need to stain the wood. If you want a darker color or a more pronounced grain pattern, go ahead and stain it. <br />
<br />
Once you know what type of wood you are working with, it will be easier to choose a stain that will enliven and restore the wood. There are many types to choose from.<br style="font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif" />
</span><br style="font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif" />
<span style="font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif; font-weight: bold">Choosing a Stain </span><br style="font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif" />
<br style="font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif" />
<span style="font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif">Several types of stains are available: wiping stains, water-base stains, varnish and sealer stains, NGR stains. Some stains are combined with a sealer, and these are usually labeled as stain/sealers. Not all are easy to use or guaranteed to give good results, so take a few minutes to plan and read the labels. </span><br style="font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif" />
<span style="font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif"><br />
The first consideration is the finish you plan to use. Most finishes can be applied over most types of stain, but polyurethane varnish cannot be applied over some stains. If you want to use a polyurethane finish -- and this type of finish is both good-looking and very durable -- look for a stain that's compatible with polyurethane. If you can't find a compatible stain, you'll have to apply a clear penetrating resin sealer over a noncompatible stain. Varnish can be applied over this sealer if you want a shiny finish. </span><br style="font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif" />
<span style="font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif"><br />
The second consideration in choosing a stain is the job you want it to do. The most commonly used furniture stains are based on pigments mixed in oil or turpentine, or on aniline dyes mixed in turpentine, water, alcohol, or a volatile spirit. Other types of stains include varnish stains, sealer stains, and organic stains. </span><br style="font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif" />
<br style="font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif; font-weight: bold" />
<span style="font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif"><span style="font-weight: bold">Pigmented Oil Stains<br />
<br />
</span>The pigmented oil stains are nonpenetrating. They consist of pigments mixed in linseed oil, turpentine, mineral spirits, or a similar solvent. They are sometimes also available in gel form. They are inexpensive and easy to apply, but unless the grain of the wood is very open, they usually blur or mask the grain pattern.<br />
<br />
These stains usually don't work well on hardwoods but can be used for slight darkening on close-grained hardwoods, such as maple. The lightening stains are pigmented oil stains. Pigmented oil stains are applied by wiping and are removed after the desired color is achieved. The intensity of the color is controlled by the length of time the stain is left on the wood. Drying time can be long, and the stain must be well sealed to prevent bleeding through the finish. The wood should also be sealed before application. The colors fade over time. </span><br style="font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif" />
<br style="font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif; font-weight: bold" />
<span style="font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif"><span style="font-weight: bold">Penetrating Oil Stains<br />
<br />
</span>The penetrating oil stains are very popular; they consist of aniline dyes mixed with turpentine or a similar solvent. They are inexpensive and easy to apply, but they tend to penetrate unevenly. For this reason, they don't work well on hardwoods and are best used on pine and other softwoods. They can be used for slight darkening on close-grained hardwoods, such as maple. </span><br style="font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif" />
<span style="font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif"><br />
Penetrating oil stains are applied by wiping and are removed after the desired color is achieved. The intensity of the color is controlled by the length of time the stain is left on the wood. Drying time is relatively long, and the stain must be well sealed to prevent bleeding through the finish. This stain is very hard to remove once it's dry. The colors are rich and clear, but they fade over time. <br />
<br style="font-weight: bold" />
</span></font><font size="2" style="font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif"><span style="font-weight: bold">NGR (Non-Grain-Raising) Stains<br />
<br />
</span>The NGR stains consist of aniline dye mixed with denatured alcohol or a volatile spirit, such as methanol. They are expensive, and they can be difficult to use. Alcohol-base stains fade over time and must be sealed well to prevent bleeding; they cannot be used with shellac. Spirit-base NGR stains don't fade or bleed, and they produce a more uniform color. <br />
<br />
Alcohol- and spirit-base NGR stains dry very quickly. Apply them with very quick, even brushing. Repeated thin applications are best to minimize overlaps. One color can be applied directly over another, but too dark a color must be bleached out. NGR stains are recommended for use on hardwoods, especially close-grained woods, where oil stains would not be absorbed properly. They should not be used on softwoods. <br />
<br />
<span style="font-weight: bold">Varnish Stains<br />
<br />
</span>Varnish stain is a nonpenetrating stain, consisting of aniline dye in a varnish base. It is used by manufacturers to finish drawers, backs, and other hidden parts because it's inexpensive and no further finish is required, but it looks cheap and is generally not recommended for refinishing. <br />
<br />
<span style="font-weight: bold">Sealer Stains<br />
<br />
</span>The sealer stains are nonpenetrating mixtures of dye in a varnish, shellac, or lacquer base. Two coats are usually required, and the surface must often be protected with paste wax. No further finishing is required. <br />
<br style="font-weight: bold" />
<span style="font-weight: bold">Organic Stains<br />
<br />
</span>Several organic-base stains can be made for use on pine and other woods. The most common organic stain uses tobacco as the color, but stains can also be made from bark, roots, tea, berries, and other natural sources. These stains are interesting, but they're not recommended unless you're an accomplished refinisher. </font><br style="font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif" />
<font size="2"><span style="font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif"><br style="font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif" />
</span></font></span><span class="articleBody"><font size="2" style="font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif">Using the right staining techniques can save you time and help you avoid messes. We'll review the best ways to mix and apply stain in the next section.</font> </span>
<p class="printableTocItem">Staining Techniques for Wooden Furniture</p>
<span class="articleBody"><font size="2" style="font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif">Whatever type of stain you're using, the most important part of the process is getting the color you want. You may be able to buy stain in the color you want. If not, and if you have a sample of the stain color you want, take it to the paint store and have a color mixed to match. Experiment, mixing small amounts of stain and applying test batches to scrap wood, until you get the right color. <br />
<br />
Although a wide range of stain colors is available, you can mix almost any color with two or more of the four basic shades: light oak (tan), walnut (brown), maple (yellow-orange), and mahogany (red). Most manufacturers provide mixing proportions for various effects.<br />
<br />
To dull any color, add a drop or two of black. Mix small amounts of stain at first; then, starting full-strength and thinning the stain gradually with the proper solvent, test the stain on scrap wood until you have the right color. Keep track of the proportions so you'll be able to duplicate the mixture. When you like the color, test it again on a hidden part of the piece of furniture. If the piece is made of two or more woods, you may have to mix stain separately for each wood, but this is often not necessary. <br />
<br />
When you're satisfied with the stain color, mix enough stain to treat the entire piece of furniture. Do not mix brands or types of stain, and do not change brands or types in the middle of the job. It's better to have stain left over than to run out of stain with one table leg or chair arm to go.<br />
<br />
</font></span><font size="2"><span style="font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif">Whatever stain you're using, it's best to go carefully. If you're not sure the color is right, thin the stain to lighten it and apply several coats of stain until the color is as deep as you want it. Always test the stain in an inconspicuous spot, and stain the least conspicuous surfaces first. It may take longer this way to get the effect you want, but the only way to salvage a badly applied stain is to bleach it out and start over. </span><br style="font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif" />
<span style="font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif"><br />
To prevent drip marks and uneven color, turn the piece of furniture so that the surface being stained is always horizontal. If you're working on a large piece and this isn't practical, start at the bottom and work up. Always work quickly, applying stain smoothly and evenly over the entire surface.<br />
<br style="font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif" />
</span></font><font size="2"><span style="font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif"><span style="font-weight: bold">Pigmented or Penetrating Oil Stains<br />
<br />
</span>Apply pigmented or penetrating oil stain with a clean brush, flowing stain evenly along the grain of the wood. You can also use a clean cloth or sponge to apply penetrating stain. Let pigmented oil stain set for about 10 to 15 minutes, until the surface of the stain starts to turn dull, then firmly wipe off the excess stain with a clean cloth dampened with stain. <br />
<br />
Penetrating oil stains work more quickly than pigmented ones. Wipe off the excess immediately for a light color, or let it set as long as 15 to 20 minutes for a darker color. </span><br style="font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif" />
<span style="font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif"><br />
</span></font><font size="2"><span style="font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif">Oil stain can be modified to some extent if you don't like the effect. If the wood is too dark, soak a clean cloth in turpentine or mineral spirits and rub the wood firmly and evenly along the grain. This will lighten the stain but not remove it. If part of the grain is too dark, wrap a cloth around your index finger, dip it into turpentine or mineral spirits, and lightly rub the grain you want lightened. If part of the grain is too light, use an artists' brush to carefully apply more stain just to the grain. </span><br style="font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif" />
<span style="font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif"><br />
Let the completed stain dry for about 24 hours. If the color isn't dark enough, repeat the staining procedure</span></font><font size="2"><span style="font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif">. </span><br style="font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif" />
</font>
<p>&nbsp;</p>
<table cellspacing="0" cellpadding="3" align="center">
    <tbody>
        <tr>
            <td><center><img border="0" alt="Brush oil stain evenly along the wood to cover the entire surface." src="http://static.howstuffworks.com/gif/how-to-stain-wooden-furniture-2.jpg" width="400" height="334" /><font size="-2"><br />
            &copy; 2006 Publications International<br />
            <strong>Brush oil stain on with a clean brush, flowing it evenly along <br />
            the grain of the wood to cover the entire surface.</strong></font></center></td>
        </tr>
    </tbody>
</table>
<p>&nbsp;</p>
<font size="2"><span style="font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif"><span style="font-weight: bold">Water-base Stains<br />
<br />
</span>Water-base stains should be used on clean, bare wood or on new wood. Apply stain with a new brush, flowing it on quickly and evenly along the grain of the wood. Use long, smooth strokes. Try not to overlap your strokes; a double layer of stain will dry twice as dark as a single one. It's better to use several thinned coats of stain than one dark one to minimize brush overlap marks. </span><br style="font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif" />
<span style="font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif"><br />
Water-base stain can be adjusted if you're working on relatively small surfaces. To apply water-base stain by this method, flow it onto the surface liberally; then wipe off the excess, stroking along the grain with a clean cloth. The intensity of the color is determined by the length of time the excess is left on the wood; wipe immediately for a light color or let the stain set for a darker shade. Let the completed stain dry for about 24 hours. If the color isn't dark enough, repeat the staining procedure. </span><br style="font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif" />
<br style="font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif" />
</font>
<table cellspacing="0" cellpadding="3" align="center">
    <tbody>
        <tr>
            <td><center><img border="0" alt="Use an artists' brush to carefully apply more stain to the lighter areas." src="http://static.howstuffworks.com/gif/how-to-stain-wooden-furniture-3.jpg" width="400" height="334" /><font size="-2"><br />
            &copy; 2006 Publications International<br />
            <strong>Oil stain allows some leeway for color adjustment. If part of the grain<br />
            is too light, use an artists' brush to apply more stain to the lighter areas.</strong></font></center></td>
        </tr>
    </tbody>
</table>
<span class="articleBody"><font size="2"><span style="font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif"><span style="font-weight: bold">NGR Stains<br />
<br />
</span>NGR stain, either alcohol- or spirit-base, is applied like water-base stain, but this type of stain dries so quickly that it can be hard to apply. Use a medium-size new brush to apply NGR stain, flowing it on quickly and evenly along the grain of the wood. Make long, smooth, light strokes, and try not to overlap the strokes. Brush overlap marks will dry twice as dark as the rest of the stain. <br />
<br />
To minimize overlap marks, it's better to use several thinned coats of stain than one dark one. </span><br style="font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif" />
<span style="font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif">NGR stains cannot be adjusted and should not be applied in very humid weather. An unsatisfactory stain must be bleached out. Let the stain dry completely before finishing the wood -- about half an hour for alcohol-base stain and about one hour for methanol- or other spirit-base stain. </span><br style="font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif" />
<br style="font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif" />
<span style="font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif"><span style="font-weight: bold">Lightening<br />
<br />
</span>Dark wood can be lightened with stain for an interesting light-dark effect. Lightening is not recommended for fine woods because it covers the natural color and grain of the wood; as a last resort, though, it can be effective. Lightening works best on open-grained wood; the effect of a lighter color is produced because the grain is filled with a light or white pigment. The lightening agent is sometimes thinned white oil-base paint, but more often it is pigmented oil stain. </span><br style="font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif" />
<span style="font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif"><br />
Apply the oil stain as above, and let it set to achieve the desired effect. Wipe off excess stain, and let the stained wood dry completely. </span><br style="font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif" />
<br style="font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif; font-weight: bold" />
<span style="font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif"><span style="font-weight: bold">Post-Stain Treatment</span> <br />
<br style="font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif" />
</span><span style="font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif">Any stain, even an oil-base stain, may raise the grain of the wood slightly. If necessary, remove this slight roughness when the stain is completely dry, but smooth the wood very carefully to avoid removing the stain. To smooth wood treated with oil-base stain, rub it gently with No. 000 or 0000 steel wool. To smooth wood treated with water-base or NGR stain, sand it very lightly with fine-grit sandpaper. Remove all sanding debris with a tack cloth. Sanding may remove water-base stain in spots; if the surface is uneven in color, you may have to apply another coat of stain. </span><br style="font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif" />
<span style="font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif"><br />
<br />
To complete your post-stain treatment, you will have to apply a coat of sealer. For a full explanation of this process, move on to the next section. </span></font></span>
<p class="printableTocItem">How to Seal Wooden Furniture</p>
<font size="2"><span style="font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif">Most stains should be sealed to prevent bleeding. After smoothing the stained wood, apply a sealer coat of thinned shellac, sanding sealer, or other appropriate sealer. Do not use shellac with NGR or water-base stains. If you plan to finish the piece with polyurethane, make sure the sealer is compatible. Let the sealed wood dry completely, then sand the surface very lightly with fine-grit sandpaper. Remove the sanding debris with a tack cloth.</span></font><span class="articleBody"><font size="2" style="font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif"> Like good sanding, careful sealing can make all the difference to your results in refinishing furniture. <br />
<br />
<span style="font-weight: bold">Choosing a Sealer <br />
<br />
</span>The traditional sealer for shellac, lacquer, and natural varnish finishes is thinned white shellac. This basic sealer is simply a mixture of 1 part white shellac (4-pound cut) and 3 to 4 parts denatured alcohol. Shellac is suitable for most refinishing jobs, but it cannot be used with polyurethane varnish or with water or NGR (non-grain-raising) stains. <br />
<br />
Where shellac cannot be used, the easiest sealer is a commercial sanding sealer. Sanding sealer dries quickly and provides a very good sanding base; it can be used with varnish, shellac, or lacquer. If you plan to finish the piece with polyurethane varnish, read the label carefully; sanding sealer may not be compatible with polyurethane. Sealing is not necessary before finishing with a penetrating resin sealer. <br />
<br />
Under natural varnish or lacquer finishes, some professionals prefer to seal the wood with a thinned mixture of the same finish. To make a natural varnish sealer, thin the varnish with turpentine or mineral spirits to make a 50-50 mixture. To make lacquer sealer, mix lacquer and lacquer thinner in equal parts. These sealers cannot be used with shellac or with polyurethane varnish. <br />
<br />
Polyurethane varnish demands special treatment. Read the labels carefully when you buy. Some polyurethanes can be thinned with a specific thinner; with these varnishes, the manufacturer may recommend thin varnish coats as sealers. Some polyurethanes do not require sealers. If you must seal stain or filler before polyurethane is applied, make sure the sealer is compatible with the varnish. Otherwise, use a penetrating resin sealer. This finishes the wood completely, but you can apply polyurethane over it if you want a smoother finish. <br />
<br />
<span style="font-weight: bold">Sealing Technique</span><br />
<br />
Apply the sealer with a clean brush, flowing it on evenly and quickly along the grain of the wood. Make sure all surfaces are evenly covered, and pay particular attention to any end grain. End grain that isn't properly sealed will absorb stains and finishes more deeply than the rest of the wood in a piece. <br />
<br />
Let the sealer dry completely: about two hours for thinned white shellac, about one hour for commercial sanding sealer. Then sand the surface very lightly with fine-grit sandpaper, grade 7/0. The wood must be very smooth, but the sanding shouldn't penetrate the sealer. Remove all sanding debris with a tack cloth. <br />
<br />
If you're applying a finish directly over sanded wood, more than one coat of sealer may be necessary to close the wood's pores completely. In this case, let the first coat of sealer dry completely before applying another coat. Very porous woods may require several coats of sealer. <br />
<br />
Staining a piece of wooden furniture can greatly enhance its appearance and hide minor imperfections. Though preparing your piece for staining may take a little work, it will be worth it once you see that beautiful color.<br />
<br />
</font><font size="-1"><sup>&copy; </sup></font><font size="2" style="font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif"><span style="font-style: italic">Publications International, Ltd.</span></font></span><br />
&nbsp;</div>
<p>&nbsp;</p>]]></description>
		</item>
		
			<item>
			<link>http://www.bluestrait.com/blog/article.asp?id=188</link>
			<title><![CDATA[[转贴] A Guide to Furniture Finishes]]></title>
			<author>bluestrait@gmail.com(黄敏)</author>
			<category><![CDATA[DIY]]></category>
			<pubDate>Wed,08 Jul 2009 19:02:27 +0800</pubDate>
			<guid>http://www.bluestrait.com/blog/default.asp?id=188</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[<div class="head">
<div class="title">
<h1><span class="articleTitle">A Guide to Furniture Finishes</span></h1>
<p class="articleByLine">by <a href="http://home.howstuffworks.com/guide-to-furniture-finishes-ga.htm/hsw-contact.htm" jquery1247104898277="33">the Editors of Consumer Guide</a></p>
</div>
<div class="pageToolsReturn">Browse the article <b><a href="http://home.howstuffworks.com/guide-to-furniture-finishes-ga.htm" jquery1247104898277="34">A Guide to Furniture Finishes</a></b></div>
</div>
<div class="articleBody">
<p class="printableTocItem">How to Choose a Furniture Finish</p>
<font size="2" style="font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif">Putting the finish on furniture is the final payoff for all the hours you've spent removing the old finish, making repairs, sanding, staining, and smoothing. Some might consider the finishing step as routine, others might think it's creative. Either way, it is usually easy to do, if you use the right materials, take your time, and exercise a little patience. In this article, we'll discuss how to pick the best finish for your furniture wood. We'll also review some application techniques, including preparation work and drying tips, so whatever finish you choose should provide a long-lasting look.<br />
<br />
<span style="font-weight: bold">Types of Finish<br />
<br />
</span>Furniture finishes can be classified into several basic types: varnish, penetrating resin, shellac, lacquer, wax, and oil. All these finishes are designed to protect the wood and to bring out its natural beauty, and all of them can be assessed in terms of how well they accomplish these objectives. Consequently, choosing a finish comes down to two essential factors: How do you want the wood to look? How durable do you want the finished surface to be? <br />
<br />
Of the six basic finishes, all can be beautiful, but when it comes to durability, two types outperform all the others: varnish and penetrating resin. Varnish, the most durable of all finishes, is available in high-gloss, satin, and flat forms for whatever surface shine you want. Applying varnish can be difficult, but the results are worth the work. Penetrating resin sinks into the wood to give it a natural look and feel; it is easy to apply and durable. The other furniture finishes do have their advantages. <br />
<br />
Oil, for instance, produces a very natural finish. Shellac dries fast and is easy to use. But for most refinishing, varnish or penetrating resin is probably the best choice. <br />
<span style="font-weight: bold"><br />
</span>Whatever finish you choose, it's important to know exactly what you're working with. Some finishes can be mixed and some cannot. Each finish has its own individual application techniques; each finish requires different tools and materials. Before you buy and apply a finish, always read the ingredient and application information on the container. And always follow the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. <br />
<br />
The one requirement common to all finishes is a dust-free environment during application. Providing this environment isn't easy, but it can be done. Consider using a finish that dries with a matte or flat surface; this type of finish gives you the opportunity to remove dirt and lint with rubbing abrasives. <span style="font-weight: bold"><br />
<br />
</span>In most cases, how a piece of furniture stands up to wear is as important as how it looks. Durability is a primary consideration in choosing a finish. The most durable finishes, varnish and penetrating resin, are thus the two basic finishes for refinishing. Varnish is the more protective of the two because it is a surface coat; damage to the varnish does not always extend to the wood. Penetrating resin hardens in the wood itself. Although it doesn't protect the surface from damage as effectively as varnish, it may stand up to heavy use better because it's easy to reapply and doesn't chip or craze.<br />
<br />
If varnish is your choice, check the next section on how to work with this durable, slow-drying finish.<br />
</font>
<p class="printableTocItem">How to Varnish Furniture</p>
<font size="2" style="font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif">Varnish, one of the toughest of the finishes, is superior to the other traditional finishes. It enhances and gives warmth to the grain of the wood and is resistant to impact, heat, abrasion, water, and alcohol. It can be used as a topcoat over worn finishes. Varnish provides a clear finish, but it darkens the wood slightly. It is available in high-gloss, semigloss or satin, and matte or flat surface finishes. There are many types to choose from, but it's important to decide on one that will work well with your furniture wood.<br />
<br style="font-weight: bold" />
<span style="font-weight: bold">Types of Varnish</span><br />
<br />
The traditional varnish is based on natural resins and oils and is thinned with mineral spirits or turpentine. Spar varnish is a natural varnish formulated to stay tacky; it should never be used for furniture. Synthetic varnishes are based on synthetic resins and require special thinners. <br />
<br />
The best of the synthetic varnishes is the polyurethane type; polyurethanes are clear, non-yellowing, and very tough. Other synthetic varnishes are the phenolics, used for exterior and some marine work, and the alkyds, often used in colored preparations. Phenolic and alkyd varnishes yellow with age and are not recommended for refinishing. With any type of varnish, look for quick drying to minimize dust problems. Use spray varnish only where brushing is impractical, such as on wicker or rattan. <br />
<br />
Water-base varnishes offer similar results without the cleanup hassle and toxicity. Most dry clear to the touch in 15 to 30 minutes. They don't crack, chip, or bubble, and they are water- and alcohol-resistant. Best of all, these varnishes do not yellow. However, when applied in several coats, the finish might begin to cloud, depending on the wood. <br />
<br />
<span style="font-weight: bold">Special Requirements</span><br />
<br />
Natural varnish can be used with any stain or filler. The sealer for natural varnish is thinned shellac or a mixture of 1 part varnish and 1 part turpentine or mineral spirits. Do not mix brands or types of varnish. Polyurethane varnish is not compatible with all stains and fillers. Before buying, read the labels to make sure you're using compatible materials. Some polyurethanes can be thinned for use as a sealer; some do not require sealers. Some sanding sealers are compatible with polyurethanes. <br />
<br />
Water-base varnish can be used over stain and filler, provided you allow the undercoats to fully cure. This process can take up to a month. You can also apply a sealer coat of shellac between the two if you don't want to wait.<br />
<br />
</font><font size="2" style="font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif">Be aware that varnish generally dries very slowly and can be difficult to apply, so it's important to know how to use this finish.</font><br />
<font size="2" style="font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif"><br style="font-weight: bold" />
<span style="font-weight: bold">Application Techniques</span><br />
<br />
</font><font size="2" style="font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif">Apply varnish with a new, clean, natural-bristle brush. Use only new varnish. Varnish that's been used several times may contain lumps of hardened varnish from around the sides and rim of the container. These lumps can really cause trouble. If you plan the job properly, you probably won't have enough varnish left to be wasteful. Leftover varnish can be used on parts that won't show or projects where the finish isn't critical. <br />
<br />
Bare wood to be finished with varnish must be properly prepared, and sanded. (For guidelines on sanding, </font><font size="2"><a href="http://howstuffworks.com/how-to-stain-wooden-furniture2.htm" target="_self" jquery1247104898277="35" style="font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif">click here</a></font><font size="2" style="font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif">.) Finished</font><span style="font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif"><font size="2" style="font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif"> wood to be top-coated must be cleaned and lightly sanded. Immediately before applying the varnish, clean each surface thoroughly with a tack cloth. <br />
<br />
It's much easier to apply varnish to horizontal surfaces than vertical surfaces. Before you start to work, turn the piece of furniture so that its major surfaces are horizontal. If the piece has drawers, doors, shelving, and other removable parts, take them out or off and finish them horizontally. Work on only one surface at a time, and work on large surfaces last. <br />
<br />
Apply varnish to the prepared wood with long, smooth, even strokes, laying the varnish along the grain in strips the width of the brush. Do not touch the brush to the rim of the varnish container; shake or tap off excess varnish inside the container or on a strike can. The varnish should flow onto the surface of the wood, with no drag. If the brush starts to pull or if you see small missed or thin spots, add about 1 ounce of thinner to the varnish. </font><br />
<font size="2" style="font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif"><br />
For natural varnish, use turpentine or mineral spirits. For polyurethane varnish, use the thinner recommended by the manufacturer. Stir the thinner gently into the varnish, being careful not to raise any bubbles. <br />
</font>
<p>&nbsp;</p>
<table cellspacing="0" cellpadding="3" align="center">
    <tbody>
        <tr>
            <td><center><img border="0" alt="Apply varnish in even strokes across the grain of the wood." src="http://static.howstuffworks.com/gif/how-to-varnish-wooden-furniture-1.jpg" width="400" height="329" /><font size="-2"><br />
            <br />
            <b>Apply varnish first along the grain of the wood, flowing it on in even <br />
            strips. Then apply more varnish across the grain to level and even the surface. </b></font></center></td>
        </tr>
    </tbody>
</table>
<p>&nbsp;</p>
<font size="2" style="font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif">After laying on an even coat of varnish in strips along the grain of the wood, apply more varnish in even strokes across the grain of the wood to level and even the surface. The varnish should be as even and level as possible, with no thick or thin spots, but a thin coat is better than a thick one. <br />
<br />
Thick coats of varnish take longer to dry, and they tend to crack as the varnish ages. As you work, remove dust and lint from the wet finish with a rosin lint picker. <br />
<br />
</font>
<p>&nbsp;</p>
<table cellspacing="0" cellpadding="3" align="center">
    <tbody>
        <tr>
            <td><center><img border="0" alt="Smooth the surface by stroking it very lightly along the grain with an almost dry brush. " src="http://static.howstuffworks.com/gif/how-to-varnish-wooden-furniture-2.jpg" width="400" height="413" /><font size="-2"><br />
            <br />
            <b>After leveling the varnish across the grain, smooth the surface by stroking it <br />
            very lightly along the grain with an almost dry brush. Pick off dust and lint as you work. </b></font><br />
            </center></td>
        </tr>
    </tbody>
</table>
<p>&nbsp;</p>
<font size="2" style="font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif">To finish each surface, tip off the wet varnish in the direction of the grain. Use an almost dry brush for this step. Holding the brush at a slight angle to the surface, very lightly stroke the surface of the varnish to remove brush marks and even the surface. Smooth the entire varnished surface, working in strips along the grain of the wood. As you work, pick off dust and lint with a lint picker. Any remaining brush marks will disappear as the varnish dries. <br />
<br />
Varnish must be applied carefully to prevent thick spots. At outside corners, work from the flat surface toward the corner; lift the brush as it nears the corner and before it flips down over the edge. This prevents a buildup of varnish along the edge. At inside corners, work an inch or two away from the corner; then brush the varnish into the corner, tip it off, and leave it alone. This method prevents buildup on many flat-surface brushings. <br />
<br />
Spots that tend to hold varnish, such as tiny potholes, should be coated just once with varnish and tipped just once with the brush. Repeated tipping will leave a bulge. <br />
<br />
Brush lengthwise along rungs, spindles, and other turnings. On carved moldings, apply the finish to the carvings first with a fairly dry brush; then finish the flat surfaces with the tip of the brush. Finally, use a very dry brush to go over the carvings and then the flats, leveling the finish and removing any fat edges, sags, or runs. On raised panel doors, finish the panels first and then move on to the flat framing. The finish will build up at the miters in the frame where they meet the panel; remove the excess with a very dry brush, working from the corner out. <br />
<br />
<span style="font-weight: bold">Drying and Recoating</span><br />
<br />
Drying times for natural varnish average about 24 hours, but water-base varnish and polyurethanes often dry more quickly. Dampness slows drying, so it's recommended that you extend all drying times if you're applying varnish in humid or wet weather. Also, drying times are not necessarily curing times, and new varnish is easily damaged. Always let the finish dry at least 24 hours or as long as the manufacturer recommends; if possible, let it dry a couple of days or more. <br />
<br />
Pick off lint and dust only while the surface is wet or sticky; too much interference could damage it. <br />
<br />
Many varnishes require two or even three coats for a smooth finish -- use your own judgment, and follow the manufacturer's recommendations. Between coats of varnish, let the first coat of varnish harden or dry, as recommended by the manufacturer.<br />
<br />
Some two-coat varnishes should be applied 10 to 15 hours from the time the first coat was applied, but in general it's best to wait at least 24 hours -- longer, if possible. When the first coat is completely dry, lightly sand the varnished wood in the direction of the grain, using grade 7/0 sandpaper on a padded sanding block. Abrade the surface evenly, but don't cut it deeply.<br />
<br />
Clean away all sanding residue with a tack cloth, and apply the second coat of varnish the same way as you did the first. Repeat this procedure, sanding the varnished wood carefully, if a third coat of varnish is required.<br />
<br />
In addition to varnish, another option that stands up well to heavy use is a penetrating resin finish. Check out the next section for when and how to use this type of finish.</font><br />
</span>
<p class="printableTocItem">How to Apply a Penetrating Resin Finish</p>
<font size="2" style="font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif">Penetrating resin finishes, unlike varnish, are not surface finishes; they soak into the wood to harden the fibers themselves. Wood treated with penetrating resin has a very natural look and feel, as if it were unfinished, and the grain is strongly highlighted. Penetrating resin is very durable and withstands heavy wear; it is both easy to apply and easy to repair. It dries clear, but it darkens the wood slightly. It is also available in several stain colors.<br />
<br />
Because penetrating resin must soak into the wood, it is best used on open-grained woods. Very close-grained woods may not absorb it deeply. On stripped wood, all old filler must be removed. If filler is left in the wood, the finish will not be absorbed. <br />
<br />
Penetrating resin is recommended for use on oily hardwoods, such as rosewood and teak, and is especially effective on oak and walnut. It is often preferable to varnish for use on large pieces of furniture and complex carvings. It dries relatively slowly, but because it is not a surface finish, dust is not a problem. A penetrating resin finish is very hard to remove for future refinishers, so it's important to choose the right one for the job.<br />
<br />
<span style="font-weight: bold">Types of Penetrating Resin</span><br />
<br />
Penetrating resin finishes are formulated with two different types of resins: phenolic and alkyd. There is little difference in performance between these types, but phenolic-base compounds may penetrate the wood more deeply than alkyd types. <br />
<br />
<span style="font-weight: bold">Special Requirements</span><br />
<br />
Penetrating resin can be used over any stain except varnish- or vinyl-base types. No filling or sealing is required. Before applying penetrating resin on bleached or stained surfaces, test it on a hidden part of the piece. <br />
<br />
<span style="font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif; font-weight: bold">Application Techniques</span><br />
<br />
Wood to be finished with penetrating resin must be properly prepared and sanded. Because the finish does not coat the surface of the wood, any rough spots or other defects will be accentuated when the resin is applied. Immediately before applying the resin, clean the piece of furniture thoroughly with a tack cloth. <br />
<br />
Whenever possible, penetrating resin should be applied to horizontal surfaces. If the piece of furniture has removable parts, remove them and finish them horizontally. Apply penetrating resin with a clean brush or cloth, with No. 0000 steel wool, or pour it directly onto the wood. Work on small areas at a time. On rungs or spindles, apply the resin with a clean cloth one rung at a time. <br />
<br />
Spread the resin liberally and evenly over the wood. The appearance of the surface isn't critical, but the amount of resin used on each surface should be consistent. As you work, watch the wood surface. Some open-grained woods soak up the finish very quickly, others -- especially close-grained hardwoods -- absorb it slowly and may not absorb much. Apply resin until the wood stops absorbing it. <br />
<br />
Let the resin set for about 30 to 45 minutes. During this time, keep the surface wet, adding more resin to any dry spots that appear. All surfaces should be shiny. After 30 to 45 minutes, when the wood will not absorb any more resin and the surface is still wet, firmly wipe off the excess finish with clean, absorbent cloths. The surface of the wood should be completely dry, with no wet, shiny spots. <br />
<br />
<span style="font-weight: bold">Drying and Recoating</span><br />
<br />
Let the newly applied resin dry for 24 hours. If glossy patches appear on the wood during the drying period, remove them immediately. Add resin to these areas to soften the dried finish, and wipe off the liquid resin so that the wood is dry. <br />
<br />
After 24 hours, smooth the wood gently with No. 000 or 0000 steel wool; then clean it thoroughly with a tack cloth. Apply a second coat of penetrating resin, letting it penetrate and wiping off the excess as above. If necessary on very open-grained woods, apply a third coat of resin; wait 24 hours and smooth the surface with steel wool before application, as above. No wax or other surface coat is needed.<br />
<br />
If you need a finish that is easy to apply and dries quickly, then check out the next section for tips on when and how to use a shellac finish.<br />
</font>
<p class="printableTocItem">How to Shellac Furniture</p>
<font size="2"><span style="font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif">Shellac is the easiest of the classic finishes to apply. It produces a very fine, mellow finish, and it accentuates the natural grain of the wood. It is especially attractive on walnut, mahogany, and fine veneer woods. It polishes well and is the basis for the traditional French polish finish on very fine furniture. Shellac is applied in several thin coats. It dries fast and can be recoated after four hours. Application mistakes can occur since many coats are required, but they are easy to fix.</span><br style="font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif" />
<span style="font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif"><br />
The big drawback to shellac is that it is not durable. Shellac is easily damaged and dissolves in both water and alcohol. White rings are usually a problem. Shellac cannot be applied in very humid weather because humidity turns it white. Shellac finishes absorb moisture and sometimes turn hazy or white with age. Repairs are easy, but frequent retouching is necessary. Shellac tends to be soft after it dries, so waxing is almost essential to protect the surface. It is best used on decorative pieces that don't have to stand up to hard wear. Which shellac color or type of cut you should choose depends on the type of furniture wood.</span><br style="font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif" />
<br style="font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif; font-weight: bold" />
<span style="font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif"><span style="font-weight: bold">Shellac Colors and Cuts</span><br />
<br />
Shellac is available in two colors: white and orange. White shellac is used for light woods and is thinned with denatured alcohol for use as a sealer. It can be tinted with alcohol-soluble aniline dye and is sometimes available in colors. orange shellac gives an amber color to the wood; this is often desirable on dark woods. It is especially attractive on walnut, mahogany, and teak. </span><br style="font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif" />
<span style="font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif"><br />
Shellac is sold in several cuts, or concentrations. The most common type is a 4-pound cut. Shellac must usually be thinned or cut with denatured alcohol before application, as directed by the manufacturer. For sealer, thin 1 part of 3- or 4-pound-cut white shellac with 4 parts denatured alcohol. For finish coats, thin 1 part 4-pound shellac with 2 parts alcohol.</span></font> <br />
<font size="2"><span style="font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif"><br />
</span></font>
<table border="2" cellspacing="0" cellpadding="4" width="100%">
    <tbody>
        <tr>
            <td style="text-align: center"><font size="3" style="font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif">&nbsp;Shellac Thinning Proportions for 4-pound Base</font><br />
            &nbsp;</td>
        </tr>
    </tbody>
</table>
<br style="font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif" />
<table border="1" cellspacing="0" cellpadding="4" width="100%">
    <tbody>
        <tr>
            <td style="font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif"><font size="2">&nbsp;<span style="font-weight: bold">Cut</span></font></td>
            <td style="font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif"><font size="2"><span style="font-weight: bold">Shellac</span><br />
            </font></td>
            <td style="font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif"><font size="2"><span style="font-weight: bold">Alcohol </span><br />
            </font></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
            <td style="font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif"><font size="2">&nbsp;<font size="2">1/2</font> pound<br />
            </font></td>
            <td style="font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif"><font size="2">1 part <br />
            </font></td>
            <td style="font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif"><font size="2">5 parts <br />
            </font></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
            <td style="font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif"><font size="2">&nbsp;1 pound<br />
            </font></td>
            <td style="font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif"><font size="2">1 part <br />
            </font></td>
            <td style="font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif"><font size="2">2 parts<br />
            </font></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
            <td style="font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif"><font size="2">&nbsp;2 pound<br />
            </font></td>
            <td style="font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif"><font size="2">4 parts<br />
            </font></td>
            <td style="font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif"><font size="2">3 parts<br />
            </font></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
            <td style="font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif"><font size="2">&nbsp;2<font size="1">1/2</font> pound<br />
            </font></td>
            <td style="font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif"><font size="2">2 parts<br />
            </font></td>
            <td style="font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif"><font size="2">1 part<br />
            </font></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
            <td style="font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif"><font size="2">&nbsp;3 pound<br />
            </font></td>
            <td style="font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif"><font size="2">4 parts<br />
            </font></td>
            <td style="font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif"><font size="2">1 part<br />
            </font></td>
        </tr>
    </tbody>
</table>
<font size="2"><span style="font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif"><br style="font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif" />
</span></font><font size="2"><span style="font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif"><span style="font-weight: bold">Special Requirements</span><br />
<br />
Shellac can be used over any stain except alcohol-base types and over any filler. Thinned shellac is recommended for sealer coats. Use denatured alcohol to thin shellac; use alcohol or ammonia for cleanup. Shellac has a very short shelf life; old shellac does not dry properly. Buy just enough for the job, and junk any leftover shellac. Some manufacturers shelf-date shellac. </span><br style="font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif" />
<br style="font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif" />
<span style="font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif"><span style="font-weight: bold">Basic Application Techniques</span><br />
<br />
Wood to be finished with shellac must be properly prepared, sanded, and sealed. (For guidelines on how to seal furniture, </span><a href="http://howstuffworks.com/how-to-stain-wooden-furniture5.htm" target="_self" jquery1247104898277="36" style="font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif">click here</a></font><font size="2"><span style="font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif">.</span></font><font size="2"><span style="font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif">) Immediately before applying shellac, clean each surface thoroughly with a tack cloth. Use a new, clean, good-quality brush, and use only new shellac, thinned to a 1-pound cut. Work on one area at a time. </span><br style="font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif" />
<span style="font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif"><br />
To apply shellac, flow it liberally onto the surface, working in long, smooth strokes along the grain of the wood. Keep the surface really wet with the shellac, and apply the finish from dry to wet edges. After coating the surface completely, tip off the shellac along the grain of the wood. Use an almost dry brush for this step. Holding the brush at a slight angle to the surface, very lightly stroke the surface of the shellac to remove brush marks and even the surface. Smooth the entire shellacked surface, working in strips along the grain of the wood.<br />
<br />
</span></font><font size="2"><span style="font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif"><span style="font-weight: bold">The French Polish Finish Technique</span><br />
<br />
This shellac finishing technique produces a much more durable surface than the standard shellac finish. French-polished surfaces have a very distinctive, velvety sheen, and the grain and color of the wood are emphasized. It is best used on close-grained woods and fine veneers. Use only water stain or spirit-base non-grain-raising (NGR) stain under French polish; other types may bleed or lift.<br />
</span></font><span style="font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif"><br />
<font size="2"><span style="font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif">To apply a French polish finish, mix 2 tablespoons of boiled linseed oil into 1 pint of 1-pound-cut shellac. Make a palm-size pad of cheesecloth, and wrap it in a clean, lint-free linen or cotton cloth. The pad should just fit in your palm. Dip the pad into the shellac/oil mixture; don't soak it. Make sure the surface of the pad is not wrinkled. </span></font></span><br style="font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif" />
<font size="2"><span style="font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif"><br />
Apply the shellac/oil mixture to the prepared wood, spreading it evenly along the grain to cover the entire surface; work with a quick padding stroke, blending your strokes carefully. Then rub the wet surface with the pad, using a firm circular or figure-eight motion over the wood. Continue this circular rubbing for about 45 minutes, using plenty of downward pressure and adding shellac as the mixture is worked into the wood. The surface should be evenly glossy, with no dark spots or stroke marks. </span><br style="font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif" />
<span style="font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif"><br />
Let the rubbed shellac/oil mixture dry for 24 hours; then apply another coat of shellac/oil as above. Rub the second coat in for 45 minutes, and let it dry for two to three days. Apply a third coat the same way. </span><br style="font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif" />
<span style="font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif"><br />
Let the wood dry for at least a week, but not more than 10 days, after the final coat. Finally, clean the surface, wax the finished wood with a good-quality paste wax, and buff it to a fine sheen</span></font><font size="2"><span style="font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif">.<br style="font-style: italic" />
</span></font>
<p style="font-style: italic">&nbsp;</p>
<table cellspacing="0" cellpadding="3" align="center">
    <tbody>
        <tr>
            <td><center><img border="0" alt="Apply the shellac/oil mixture and rub it in with a circular or figure-eight motion." src="http://static.howstuffworks.com/gif/how-to-shellac-wooden-furniture-1.jpg" width="400" height="299" /><font size="-2"><br />
            <br />
            <b>The French Polish Finish is achieved by hand-rubbing. Apply the shellac/oil mixture <br />
            and rub it in with a circular or figure-eight motion. Continue rubbing <br />
            for 45 minutes, adding more finish as necessary</b></font></center></td>
        </tr>
    </tbody>
</table>
<p>&nbsp;</p>
<font size="2"><span style="font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif"><span style="font-weight: bold">Drying and Recoating</span><br />
<br />
Shellac dries in about 30 minutes and can be recoated after four hours. Let the new shellac set for a full four hours. Make sure drying time is adequate. Shellac is soft, and it can pick up sandpaper grains or steel wool shreds if it isn't completely dry. This can result in a nightmare of smoothing to remove the debris. </span><br style="font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif" />
<span style="font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif"><br />
When the shellac is completely dry, lightly sand the surface with grade 7/0 open-coat sandpaper on a padded sanding block. Clean the sanded surface thoroughly with a tack cloth, and then apply a second coat of shellac, as above. Let the shellac dry for four hours; then repeat, sanding and cleaning the surface, to apply a third coat. Additional coats of shellac can be added, if you want a smoother surface; let each coat dry thoroughly before applying a new one, and buff the finish with fine steel wool between coats. </span><br style="font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif" />
<span style="font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif"><br />
Let the final coat of shellac harden for 48 hours. With grade No. 0000 steel wool, remove the gloss from the finished surface, rubbing carefully along the grain of the wood. Do not rub across the grain. When the gloss is completely removed, let the piece of furniture stand for 48 hours. Then apply a good-quality paste wax to the finished wood, and buff the surface to a shine with a soft cloth or the buffing attachment of an electric drill.<br />
<br />
Another option to consider is a lacquer finish, which dries quickly but can be difficult to apply depending on the job. Learn about when and how to lacquer furniture in the next section.</span></font><br style="font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif" />
<p class="printableTocItem">How to Lacquer Furniture</p>
<font size="2" style="font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif">Lacquer is the fastest-drying of the finishes for wooden furniture. It is more durable than shellac -- although it is very thin -- and must be applied in many thin coats. It is available in high-gloss, satin, and matte finishes, in clear form and in several clear stain colors. <br />
<br />
Dust-free drying is not a problem, but because lacquer dries so fast -- sometimes almost instantly -- it is very difficult to work with. Brushing lacquers are not recommended for amateur use; spraying lacquers must be applied with a motorized spray gun. Lacquer fumes can be both toxic and explosive. For these reasons, lacquer is not usually used in amateur refinishing. For small jobs, lacquer can be applied with aerosol spray cans. This is expensive, but it works well. It's important to know what type of lacquer to use for the job.<br />
<br />
<span style="font-weight: bold">Special Requirements</span><br />
<br />
Lacquer can be used on most woods, but it cannot be used on mahogany and rosewood; the oils in these woods will bleed through the finish. Lacquer can be used over lacquer-base, non-grain-raising (NGR), and water stains, and over lacquer-base fillers. It cannot be used over other finishes, or over oil-base stains or many fillers; the solvents in lacquer will dissolve other finishes and incompatible stains and fillers. Thinned lacquer or shellac or a compatible lacquer-base sanding sealer should be used as a sealer under a lacquer finish.<br />
<br />
<span style="font-weight: bold">Application Techniques</span><br />
<br />
Wood to be finished with lacquer must be properly prepared, sanded, and sealed. Immediately before applying lacquer, clean the piece of furniture thoroughly with a tack cloth. Use only aerosol spray lacquer, and protect your working area with dropcloths or newspaper. Make sure ventilation is adequate.</font><br />
<p>&nbsp;</p>
<table cellspacing="0" cellpadding="3" align="right">
    <tbody>
        <tr>
            <td><center><img border="0" alt="Diagram of spraying lacquer in strips on wooden furniture." src="http://static.howstuffworks.com/gif/how-to-lacquer-wooden-furniture-1.jpg" width="200" height="172" /><font size="-2"><br />
            </font><br />
            <font size="-2"><b>With the can about 18 inches from <br />
            the surface, spray lacquer in even <br />
            strips from side to side, top to bottom. <br />
            Overlap the strips slightly to equalize <br />
            the thickness of the lacquer film.</b></font><br />
            </center></td>
        </tr>
    </tbody>
</table>
<p>&nbsp;</p>
<font size="2" style="font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif">Before applying lacquer, test the spray can on a piece of newspaper or cardboard. Spray cans have different patterns of spray; practicing and watching the test spray pattern will give you enough control to properly cover the surface you're finishing.</font><br />
<br />
<font size="2" style="font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif">Apply lacquer slowly and evenly, holding the spray can upright about 18 inches away from the surface of the wood. <br />
If you work farther away than this, the lacquer will tend to &quot;orange peel,&quot; dimpling like the skin on an orange. If you work closer than 18 inches, too much lacquer may be applied to the surface, causing runs and sags in the finish. First spray the top edge of the surface; then cover the entire surface in horizontal strips, from side to side, top to bottom. As you work, overlap the lacquer spray patterns slightly. <br />
<br />
The edges of each sprayed area are thin; the centers are thick. Overlapping equalizes the thickness of the lacquer film, keeping the surface even. Never try to equalize the film by brushing the lacquer.<br />
<br />
Apply only a thin coat of lacquer; this finish must be applied in many thin layers.<br />
<br />
<span style="font-weight: bold">Drying and Recoating</span><br />
<br />
Lacquer dries in no more than half an hour, but it must cure completely between coats. Let the newly sprayed wood dry for about 48 hours, or as directed by the manufacturer. Then lightly smooth the surface with No. 000 steel wool, and clean it thoroughly with a tack cloth. Apply a second coat of lacquer as above. For a smoother finish, let the second coat dry for 48 hours, smooth the surface with No. 000 steel wool, and apply a third coat of lacquer as above.<br />
<br />
Runs and sags are usually caused by too much lacquer, but they don't always appear on the first couple of coats. The solvent in each coat of lacquer softens the dried lacquer under it to meld the coats together. As you apply more coats of lacquer, the bottom coats soften, and the lacquer film gets thicker; any unevenness can cause sags. For a very rich, deep finish, use many very thin coats of lacquer. Let the lacquer dry completely between coats, and rub the surface between coats with grade FFF powdered pumice and boiled linseed oil on a cheesecloth or felt pad.<br />
<br />
After applying the final coat of lacquer, let the piece of furniture dry for 48 hours; then lightly buff the lacquered surface with No. 0000 steel wool. Clean the surface thoroughly with a tack cloth and apply a good-quality paste wax. Buff the waxed surface to a fine gloss.<br />
<br />
If you want a finish that is not really permanent, check the next section for information on a paste wax finish, which is easy to apply and maintain.<br />
</font>
<p class="printableTocItem">How to Wax and Seal Furniture</p>
<font size="2" style="font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif">Paste wax, often used to protect finishes, is sometimes used to finish bare wooden furniture. This is most successful on hard, close-grained woods, such as maple, that have been sanded absolutely smooth. <br />
<br />
Some waxes have color added, for use on dark woods such as walnut. These waxes add color to the wood, and are especially helpful if the finish on the wood is blotchy, but they do not stain the wood or restore the finish. Paste wax is easy to apply, and is nonsticky and heat-resistant, but it is easily damaged and liable to wear. It must be reapplied periodically. Paste wax is more commonly used over a sealer stain to color, seal, and finish new or stripped wood.<br />
<br />
Sealer stain finishes, including commercial systems, are available in several colors. Sealer stains produce a very even color, with no lap marks or dark spots. They are fairly tough and are very easy to apply. They are not very water-resistant and must often be recoated periodically. But before you begin the project, it's important to know the type of wood you are working with.<br />
<br style="font-weight: bold" />
<span style="font-weight: bold">Special Requirements</span><br />
<br />
Paste wax can be applied directly over prepared bare or stained wood; thinned shellac is recommended as a sealer coat. Sealer stains should be applied directly over prepared bare wood; no other sealer is required. Open-grained woods should be filled before a wax finish is applied; any paste filler is compatible. Wax and sealer stain finishes can be used on new or stripped wood.<br />
<br />
<span style="font-weight: bold">How to Apply Paste Wax</span><br />
<br />
Wood to be finished with paste wax must be thoroughly sanded and sealed with a coat of thinned shellac. When the sealer is completely dry, rub the wood along the grain with No. 0000 steel wool; then clean the piece of furniture thoroughly with a tack cloth.<br />
<br />
Apply paste wax sparingly with a clean, lint-free cloth pad, rubbing the wax on with a circular motion to form a thin, even coating. Work on a small area at a time. Some manufacturers recommend that the wax be applied with a damp -- not wet -- pad. If you use water, make sure the surface is dry before you polish it.<br />
<br />
Let the wax dry completely, as recommended by the manufacturer. Then wipe the waxed surface firmly with a clean cloth to remove excess wax. When the waxed surface is even, polish it to a shine with a clean cloth. To complete the finish, apply one or two more coats of wax, as above. Polish each coat completely before applying the next coat.<br />
&nbsp;<br />
<span style="font-weight: bold">How to Apply a Sealer Stain Finish</span><br />
<br />
Wood to be finished with a sealer stain finish must be properly prepared and sanded; no other preparation is necessary. Thoroughly mix the sealer stain. Apply the stain evenly along the grain with a clean brush or cloth, and let it stand for 10 to 15 minutes; then wipe off the excess with a clean cloth. Let the wood dry for 24 hours and apply a second coat of stain, as above. To complete the finish, apply one or two coats of paste wax, as above. Polish each coat thoroughly with a clean cloth.<br />
<br />
For a natural finish look on your wooden furniture, learn how and when to use Danish oil and other modern finishing oils in the next section.<br />
</font>
<p class="printableTocItem">How to Apply Oil Finish on Furniture</p>
<font size="2" style="font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif">An oil finish is designed to protect wood and bring out its natural beauty, which makes it a popular finish for revitalizing wooden furniture. <br />
<br />
Oil is penetrating and durable; it is water- and alcohol-resistant, and gives wooden furniture an attractive natural sheen and texture. </font><font size="2" style="font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif">Hand-rubbed oil finishes can be beautiful, but only if they're properly applied. Danish and tung oil finishes are far superior to the traditional linseed oil; linseed oil is sticky and hard to apply. Any oil finish must be reapplied periodically, but Danish and tung oil require far less reapplication than linseed oil. It's important to choose the right oil finish for your furniture project.<br />
<br />
<span style="font-weight: bold">Types of Oil Finishes</span><br />
<br />
Modern oil finishes -- Danish oil, a synthetic, and natural tung-oil sealers -- are penetrating finishes, but they should be applied periodically. Tung-oil finishes are available in semigloss and high-gloss forms, and also in several stain colors. Danish oil usually has a satin finish.<br />
<br />
A linseed oil finish is rich and glossy, but many applications are required for a good finish. The classic linseed oil finish is a mixture of equal parts of boiled linseed oil and turpentine. There are many variations on the linseed oil finish. One of the best of them is the Mary Roalman finish, which consists of equal parts of boiled linseed oil, turpentine, and natural varnish. Mix the linseed oil finishes several days before you use them. For most pieces, a pint of each ingredient is plenty.<br />
<br />
<span style="font-weight: bold">Special Requirements</span><br />
<br />
Oil finishes can be applied directly over prepared bare or stained wood. Only water or non-grain-raising (NGR) stains should be used; oil-base stains interfere with the penetration of the oil. Stain-color tung-oil sealers stain and finish in one operation. Very open-grained woods should be filled before an oil finish is applied; any paste filler is compatible. No sealing is required.<br />
<span style="font-weight: bold"><br />
Application Techniques<br />
</span><br />
Wood to be finished with oil must be thoroughly sanded to even out the open pores to create a smooth surface. No sealing is necessary. Before applying the finish, clean the piece of furniture thoroughly with a tack cloth.<br />
<br />
Apply the oil -- Danish oil, tung-oil sealer, linseed oil, or the Mary Roalman mixture -- with a clean cheesecloth pad, using a circular or figure-eight motion to work it into the wood. Apply oil evenly and liberally, until the wood has stopped absorbing it; work on one surface at a time. Apply oil until the wood is evenly oiled and the surface has stopped absorbing.<br />
<br />
Rub the oil firmly into the wood with the heels of your hands, working along the grain. Continue rubbing for about 15 minutes; as you rub, the warmth you generate will help the oil penetrate into the wood. Danish oil and tung oil may not require such extensive rubbing; follow the manufacturer's specific instructions. Finally, after thoroughly rubbing all surfaces, wipe the piece of furniture clean with a clean cloth. You must remove all excess oil; there should be no oil -- or, if you're using a linseed finish, only a very thin film of oil -- on the surface of the wood.</font><br />
<p>&nbsp;</p>
<table cellspacing="0" cellpadding="3" align="center">
    <tbody>
        <tr>
            <td><center><img border="0" alt="Diagram of oil being applied by hand to wooden furniture." src="http://static.howstuffworks.com/gif/how-to-apply-an-oil-finish-to-wooden-furniture-1.jpg" width="400" height="334" /><font size="-2"><br />
            </font><br />
            <font size="-2"><b>Apply oil liberally until the wood stops absorbing it; working along <br />
            the grain, rub it firmly into the wood with the heels <br />
            of your hands. Then wipe off all excess oil.</b></font><br />
            </center></td>
        </tr>
    </tbody>
</table>
<p>&nbsp;</p>
<font size="2" style="font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif"><span style="font-weight: bold">Drying and Recoating</span><br />
<br />
Danish oil and tung oil dry more quickly than linseed oil. In most cases, they can be reapplied after 12 to 24 hours; follow the manufacturer's specific instructions. Linseed-oil finishes must dry for about a week; drying takes longer in very humid weather. Do not recoat a linseed-oil finish until it's completely dry, with no trace of stickiness.<br />
<br />
When the first coat of oil is completely dry, apply further coats until the finish is rich and hard. Danish oil and tung-oil sealers may require only one additional application, but linseed-oil finishes should be given 10 to 20 additional coats. Rub each additional coat of oil thoroughly into the wood, as above, and then wipe off all excess oil. Let each coat of oil dry thoroughly before applying the next -- at least one week between the first several coats, longer between later coats. If the oil isn't completely dry between coats, the finished surface will be sticky.<br />
<br />
Choosing a furniture finish can be difficult because you have many options to choose from. Varnish, penetrating resin, shellac, lacquer, paste wax, and oil were all created to help protect furniture wood. But the guidelines in this article will help you choose the one that works best with your type of wood and how you want the furniture to eventually look.<br />
<br />
</font></div>]]></description>
		</item>
		
			<item>
			<link>http://www.bluestrait.com/blog/article.asp?id=187</link>
			<title><![CDATA[[转贴] Build An Easy Workbench]]></title>
			<author>bluestrait@gmail.com(黄敏)</author>
			<category><![CDATA[DIY]]></category>
			<pubDate>Wed,08 Jul 2009 17:20:32 +0800</pubDate>
			<guid>http://www.bluestrait.com/blog/default.asp?id=187</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[<div style="margin: 5px"><script language="JavaScript" type="text/javascript">
	<!--
	function checkform (form)
	{
	  if (form.commentEmail.value == "") {
	    alert( "Please enter your email address." );
	    form.commentEmail.focus();
	    return (false);
	  } else if (form.comment.value == "") {
	  	alert( "Please enter a comment." );
	  	return (false);
	  } else if (form.blogcaptcha.value == "") {
	  	alert( "Please enter the characters shown in the image below." );
	  	return (false);
	  } else { 
	  	var atLoc = form.commentEmail.value.indexOf('@');
		var dotLoc = form.commentEmail.value.indexOf('.');
		if ((atLoc < 0) || (dotLoc < 0)) {
			alert( "Please enter a valid email address." );
			return(false);
		}
	  } 
	  return (true);
	}
	//-->
</script><style type="text/css">.maxImgWidth {
	MAX-WIDTH: 470px
}</style>
<h1 class="mainHeadline">Build An Easy Workbench</h1>
<div class="byline">BY NEAL BARRETT</div>
<div class="byline">Illustrations by George Retseck</div>
Published in the August 2003 issue. <br />
<div class="storyCopy">
<div style="clear: left; padding-top: 5px">
<div style="margin: 5px 5px 5px 1px; width: 473px; float: left"><a href="http://www.bluestrait.com/blog/javascript:showImage('http://media.popularmechanics.com/images/tb_workbench-lg.jpg','');"><img class="maxImgWidth" border="0" alt="Click to enlarge" width="470" src="http://media.popularmechanics.com/images/tb_workbench-lg.jpg" /></a> <br clear="left" />
<a href="http://www.bluestrait.com/blog/javascript:showImage('http://media.popularmechanics.com/images/tb_workbench-lg.jpg','');">Click to enlarge</a> <br clear="left" />
&nbsp;</div>
<br clear="left" />
<div style="margin-top: 5px">
<p>Sooner or later every homeowner starts compiling a list of repair or maintenance tasks that need attention. It doesn't matter if your home is new or old, urban or suburban. It just goes with the territory. And, if you're like many folks, you don't have to wait until a problem appears to feel the need to get your hands dirty. Projects just seem to call out to some people, luring them with the promise of distraction and the satisfaction of a job well-done. Whatever your motivation, there's no question that you'll need a place to face those challenges, and the logical place is a workbench. We've designed a multipurpose bench that you can put together in the course of a pleasant weekend. The materials are readily available at any reasonably stocked lumberyard or home center, and they won't cost you a week's salary.</p>
</div>
</div>
<br clear="all" />
<table border="0" cellspacing="0" cellpadding="5" bgcolor="#ffcc00">
    <tbody>
        <tr>
            <td valign="top" align="left">
            <div style="margin: 5px"><img class="maxImgWidth" border="0" alt="" width="250" height="189" src="http://media.popularmechanics.com/images/sb_workbenchplans-sm.jpg" /><br />
            <a href="http://www.bluestrait.com/blog/javascript:showImage('http://media.popularmechanics.com/images/sb_lg_workbenchhires-lg.jpg','');">Click to Enlarge</a><br />
            &nbsp;</div>
            </td>
            <td height="5" valign="top" width="5" align="left">&nbsp;</td>
            <td bgcolor="#ffffcc" valign="top" align="left">
            <div style="margin: 5px">
            <h3>&nbsp;</h3>
            <br />
            <br />
            <p>&nbsp;</p>
            <table border="1" cellspacing="2" cellpadding="0" width="350">
                <tbody>
                    <tr>
                        <td class="&ldquo;text&rdquo;" colspan="3"><b>MATERIALS LIST--WORKBENCH</b></td>
                    </tr>
                    <tr>
                        <td class="&ldquo;text&rdquo;"><b>Key</b></td>
                        <td class="&ldquo;text&rdquo;"><b>No.</b></td>
                        <td class="&ldquo;text&rdquo;"><b>Size and description (use)</b></td>
                    </tr>
                    <tr>
                        <td class="&ldquo;text&rdquo;">A</td>
                        <td class="&ldquo;text&rdquo;">1</td>
                        <td class="&ldquo;text&rdquo;">3/4 x 22-1/2 x 58-1/2&rdquo; plywood (top)</td>
                    </tr>
                    <tr>
                        <td class="&ldquo;text&rdquo;">B</td>
                        <td class="&ldquo;text&rdquo;">2</td>
                        <td class="&ldquo;text&rdquo;">3/4 x 1-1/2 x 60&rdquo; pine (edging)</td>
                    </tr>
                    <tr>
                        <td class="&ldquo;text&rdquo;">C</td>
                        <td class="&ldquo;text&rdquo;">2</td>
                        <td class="&ldquo;text&rdquo;">3/4 x 1-1/2 x 22-1/2&rdquo; pine (edging)</td>
                    </tr>
                    <tr>
                        <td class="&ldquo;text&rdquo;">D</td>
                        <td class="&ldquo;text&rdquo;">4</td>
                        <td class="&ldquo;text&rdquo;">1-1/2 x 3-1/2 x 57-1/2&rdquo; pine (long rail)</td>
                    </tr>
                    <tr>
                        <td class="&ldquo;text&rdquo;">E</td>
                        <td class="&ldquo;text&rdquo;">4</td>
                        <td class="&ldquo;text&rdquo;">1-1/2 x 3-1/2 x 18-1/2&rdquo; pine (side rail)</td>
                    </tr>
                    <tr>
                        <td class="&ldquo;text&rdquo;">F</td>
                        <td class="&ldquo;text&rdquo;">4</td>
                        <td class="&ldquo;text&rdquo;">1-1/2 x 3-1/2 x 33-1/4&rdquo; pine (leg)</td>
                    </tr>
                    <tr>
                        <td class="&ldquo;text&rdquo;">G</td>
                        <td class="&ldquo;text&rdquo;">1</td>
                        <td class="&ldquo;text&rdquo;">3/4 x 21-1/2 x 54-1/2&rdquo; plywood (shelf)</td>
                    </tr>
                    <tr>
                        <td class="&ldquo;text&rdquo;">H</td>
                        <td class="&ldquo;text&rdquo;">2</td>
                        <td class="&ldquo;text&rdquo;">3/4 x 1-1/2 x 14-1/2&rdquo; pine (edging)</td>
                    </tr>
                    <tr>
                        <td class="&ldquo;text&rdquo;">I</td>
                        <td class="&ldquo;text&rdquo;">1</td>
                        <td class="&ldquo;text&rdquo;">3/4 x 18 x 21-1/2&rdquo; plywood (drawer bottom)</td>
                    </tr>
                    <tr>
                        <td class="&ldquo;text&rdquo;">J</td>
                        <td class="&ldquo;text&rdquo;">1</td>
                        <td class="&ldquo;text&rdquo;">3/4 x 4-1/4 x 16-1/2&rdquo; plywood (drawer back)</td>
                    </tr>
                    <tr>
                        <td class="&ldquo;text&rdquo;">K</td>
                        <td class="&ldquo;text&rdquo;">2</td>
                        <td class="&ldquo;text&rdquo;">3/4 x 4-1/4 x 21-1/2&rdquo; plywood (drawer side)</td>
                    </tr>
                    <tr>
                        <td class="&ldquo;text&rdquo;">L</td>
                        <td class="&ldquo;text&rdquo;">1</td>
                        <td class="&ldquo;text&rdquo;">3/4 x 4-1/4 x 16-1/2&rdquo; plywood (drawer front)</td>
                    </tr>
                    <tr>
                        <td class="&ldquo;text&rdquo;">M</td>
                        <td class="&ldquo;text&rdquo;">1</td>
                        <td class="&ldquo;text&rdquo;">3/4 x 7-1/2 x 25-5/8&rdquo; pine (drawer face)</td>
                    </tr>
                    <tr>
                        <td class="&ldquo;text&rdquo;">N</td>
                        <td class="&ldquo;text&rdquo;">1</td>
                        <td class="&ldquo;text&rdquo;">Drawer pull (see text)</td>
                    </tr>
                    <tr>
                        <td class="&ldquo;text&rdquo;">O</td>
                        <td class="&ldquo;text&rdquo;">2</td>
                        <td class="&ldquo;text&rdquo;">3/4 x 3 x 21-1/2&rdquo; plywood (support cleat)</td>
                    </tr>
                    <tr>
                        <td class="&ldquo;text&rdquo;">P</td>
                        <td class="&ldquo;text&rdquo;">2</td>
                        <td class="&ldquo;text&rdquo;">3/4 x 5-1/8 x 21-1/2&rdquo; plywood (support side)</td>
                    </tr>
                    <tr>
                        <td class="&ldquo;text&rdquo;">Q</td>
                        <td class="&ldquo;text&rdquo;">1</td>
                        <td class="&ldquo;text&rdquo;">3/4 x 19-5/8 x 21-1/2&rdquo; plywood (support bottom)</td>
                    </tr>
                    <tr>
                        <td class="&ldquo;text&rdquo;">R</td>
                        <td class="&ldquo;text&rdquo;">16</td>
                        <td class="&ldquo;text&rdquo;">3/8 x 3&rdquo; lagscrew, washer</td>
                    </tr>
                    <tr>
                        <td class="&ldquo;text&rdquo;">S</td>
                        <td class="&ldquo;text&rdquo;">16</td>
                        <td class="&ldquo;text&rdquo;">3/8 x 3-1/2&rdquo; machine bolt, nut, washer</td>
                    </tr>
                </tbody>
            </table>
            <p>&nbsp;</p>
            </div>
            </td>
        </tr>
    </tbody>
</table>
</div>
<script language="JavaScript" type="text/javascript">
	<!--
	function checkform (form)
	{
	  if (form.commentEmail.value == "") {
	    alert( "Please enter your email address." );
	    form.commentEmail.focus();
	    return (false);
	  } else if (form.comment.value == "") {
	  	alert( "Please enter a comment." );
	  	return (false);
	  } else if (form.blogcaptcha.value == "") {
	  	alert( "Please enter the characters shown in the image below." );
	  	return (false);
	  } else { 
	  	var atLoc = form.commentEmail.value.indexOf('@');
		var dotLoc = form.commentEmail.value.indexOf('.');
		if ((atLoc < 0) || (dotLoc < 0)) {
			alert( "Please enter a valid email address." );
			return(false);
		}
	  } 
	  return (true);
	}
	//-->
</script><br />
<div class="storyCopy">
<p>Furthermore, the bench will provide you with a generous top surface, a wide storage shelf and a utility drawer that all fit in a 24 x 60-in. footprint. It's a rare basement or garage that can't yield that much space. For additional usefulness, you can mount a vise to the benchtop.</p>
<p><b>Materials Shopping</b><br />
The basic materials list consists of a 4 x 8 sheet of 3/4-in. plywood, five 2 x 4 x 8 studs, four 1 x 2 x 8 pieces of No. 2-grade pine, and one short piece of 1 x 8 pine for the drawer face. You'll also need bolts, lagscrews, finish nails, assembly screws and a drawer pull. In most markets, you can expect to spend less than $75 to build the bench (excluding the cost of a vise).</p>
<p>When you visit the lumberyard, try to select flat and straight 2 x 4 stock for the bench. You also have the option of selecting the grade and species of plywood. The least expensive choice would be construction-grade material, most commonly fir in a C/D or B/C grade. For a rough worktop, either will suffice. However, if you want a more finished look or a smoother surface, you can use a plywood with hardwood veneers or an A/C-grade fir plywood.</p>
<p><b>Making The Bench Parts</b><br />
Begin by laying out the leg and rail cuts on 2 x 4 stock. You will be able to get one leg and one long rail from each 8-ft. 2 x 4, and all of the short rails from the remaining stud. Use a circular saw to crosscut the parts. To ensure square cuts, use a speed square to guide the saw (Fig. 1).</p>
<p>Next, lay out the notches for the long rails on the bench legs. Clamp a leg to a pair of sawhorses with the top end hanging free, then make the rip cut for the top notch (Fig. 2). Stop the saw when the blade reaches the mark for the bottom of the notch. Use a handsaw to complete the cut (Fig. 3). Turn the leg on its edge and clamp it to the sawhorses. Then use the saw to make the crosscut, freeing the waste from the notch (Fig. 4).</p>
<p>With the leg still supported on its edge, make a series of parallel cuts about 1/4 in. apart for the lower rail notch (Fig. 5). Then support the leg on a piece of scrap wood, and use a sharp chisel to chop out the waste (Fig. 6).</p>
<div style="clear: left; padding-top: 5px">
<div style="margin: 5px 5px 5px 1px; width: 253px; float: left"><img class="maxImgWidth" border="0" alt="" width="250" src="http://media.popularmechanics.com/images/WB-01.jpg" /> <br clear="left" />
To crosscut a workpiece, mark a line across it, then hold a square to its edge. Run a circular saw along the square.</div>
<br clear="left" />
<div style="margin-top: 5px">&nbsp;</div>
</div>
<div style="clear: left; padding-top: 5px">
<div style="margin: 5px 5px 5px 1px; width: 253px; float: left"><img class="maxImgWidth" border="0" alt="" width="250" src="http://media.popularmechanics.com/images/WB-02.jpg" /> <br clear="left" />
Mark lines for a notch cut. Clamp the workpiece to a sawhorse, then make the long cut with a circular saw.</div>
<br clear="left" />
<div style="margin-top: 5px">&nbsp;</div>
</div>
<div style="clear: left; padding-top: 5px">
<div style="margin: 5px 5px 5px 1px; width: 253px; float: left"><img class="maxImgWidth" border="0" alt="" width="250" src="http://media.popularmechanics.com/images/WB-03.jpg" /> <br clear="left" />
The circular saw will leave a portion of uncut wood at the bottom of the long cut. Finish the cut using a handsaw.</div>
<br clear="left" />
<div style="margin-top: 5px">&nbsp;</div>
</div>
<div style="clear: left; padding-top: 5px">
<div style="margin: 5px 5px 5px 1px; width: 253px; float: left"><img class="maxImgWidth" border="0" alt="" width="250" src="http://media.popularmechanics.com/images/WB-04.jpg" /> <br clear="left" />
Clamp the workpiece vertically. Complete the notch cut with the circular saw. Cut on the waste side of the line.</div>
<br clear="left" />
<div style="margin-top: 5px">&nbsp;</div>
</div>
<div style="clear: left; padding-top: 5px">
<div style="margin: 5px 5px 5px 1px; width: 253px; float: left"><img class="maxImgWidth" border="0" alt="" width="250" src="http://media.popularmechanics.com/images/WB-05.jpg" /> <br clear="left" />
For a U-shaped notch, clamp the workpiece vertically and make a series of kerf cuts spaced about 1/4 in. apart.</div>
<br clear="left" />
<div style="margin-top: 5px">&nbsp;</div>
</div>
<div style="clear: left; padding-top: 5px">
<div style="margin: 5px 5px 5px 1px; width: 253px; float: left"><img class="maxImgWidth" border="0" alt="" width="250" src="http://media.popularmechanics.com/images/WB-06.jpg" /> <br clear="left" />
Finish the notch by clamping the workpiece horizontally on a piece of scrap lumber. Cut out the waste with a chisel.</div>
<br clear="left" />
<div style="margin-top: 5px">&nbsp;</div>
</div>
</div>
<script language="JavaScript" type="text/javascript">
	<!--
	function checkform (form)
	{
	  if (form.commentEmail.value == "") {
	    alert( "Please enter your email address." );
	    form.commentEmail.focus();
	    return (false);
	  } else if (form.comment.value == "") {
	  	alert( "Please enter a comment." );
	  	return (false);
	  } else if (form.blogcaptcha.value == "") {
	  	alert( "Please enter the characters shown in the image below." );
	  	return (false);
	  } else { 
	  	var atLoc = form.commentEmail.value.indexOf('@');
		var dotLoc = form.commentEmail.value.indexOf('.');
		if ((atLoc < 0) || (dotLoc < 0)) {
			alert( "Please enter a valid email address." );
			return(false);
		}
	  } 
	  return (true);
	}
	//-->
</script><br />
<div class="storyCopy">
<p>Take two side rails and clamp them to a pair of legs. Bore one 3/8-in.-dia. pilot hole through each joint, and install a bolt and nut to join the parts (Figs. 7 and 8). Be sure to use washers on both sides of the joint. Leave the bolts loose so you can adjust the joints. Compare the opposite diagonal measurements of the side assembly to check that it is square (Fig. 9). The meas-urements should be identical. Make any necessary adjustments, then tighten the bolts. Bore the second pilot hole in each joint, and install the rest of the bolts.</p>
<p>Clamp a top rail to the two side assemblies, and bore a pilot hole for a lagscrew in each joint. Press a lagscrew into position (Fig. 10). Firmly drive the screw, then remove the clamp and bore the second pilot hole for the second lagscrew. Follow the same procedure to install the rest of the rails. Use an open-end or ratchet wrench to tighten the lagscrews, but do not overtighten them.</p>
<p>Next, lay out the required parts on the sheet of 3/4-in. plywood. You should be able to get the top, shelf, drawer and support assembly parts from one sheet. Cut the parts to size using a circular saw guided by a straight piece of lumber clamped to the sheet (Fig. 11).</p>
<p>Place the bottom shelf in position on the bottom rails, and adjust it so that its edges are flush to the outside rail surfaces. Then place the bench top panel in place, and temporarily clamp the shelf and top in position. Use a combination drill bit/countersink to bore pilot holes in the shelf and top, then drive screws to fasten them in place (Figs. 12 and 13). If you wish, you can fill the screwholes with wood putty. When it dries, sand it flush.</p>
<p>The bench's edging consists of 1 x 2 pine. Test fit each piece first, then fasten with 6d finish nails driven into the plywood (Fig. 14).</p>
<div style="clear: left; padding-top: 5px">
<div style="margin: 5px 5px 5px 1px; width: 253px; float: left"><img class="maxImgWidth" border="0" alt="" width="250" src="http://media.popularmechanics.com/images/WB-07.jpg" /> <br clear="left" />
Clamp together all pieces that are to be bolted together. Mark bolt positions and bore the first bolt hole on the mark.</div>
<br clear="left" />
<div style="margin-top: 5px">&nbsp;</div>
</div>
<div style="clear: left; padding-top: 5px">
<div style="margin: 5px 5px 5px 1px; width: 253px; float: left"><img class="maxImgWidth" border="0" alt="" width="250" src="http://media.popularmechanics.com/images/WB-08.jpg" /> <br clear="left" />
Use a washer under the bolt head and another under the nut. Bolt the pieces together, but don't tighten the bolt.</div>
<br clear="left" />
<div style="margin-top: 5px">&nbsp;</div>
</div>
<div style="clear: left; padding-top: 5px">
<div style="margin: 5px 5px 5px 1px; width: 253px; float: left"><img class="maxImgWidth" border="0" alt="" width="250" src="http://media.popularmechanics.com/images/WB-09.jpg" /> <br clear="left" />
Check rail-leg assembly for square. Adjust as needed, then tighten bolts. Bore second bolt hole at each joint.</div>
<br clear="left" />
<div style="margin-top: 5px">&nbsp;</div>
</div>
<div style="clear: left; padding-top: 5px">
<div style="margin: 5px 5px 5px 1px; width: 253px; float: left"><img class="maxImgWidth" border="0" alt="" width="250" src="http://media.popularmechanics.com/images/WB-10.jpg" /> <br clear="left" />
Install and tighten the first lagscrew. Bore the next hole, and drive the second lagscrew. Use a washer with each screw.</div>
<br clear="left" />
<div style="margin-top: 5px">&nbsp;</div>
</div>
<div style="clear: left; padding-top: 5px">
<div style="margin: 5px 5px 5px 1px; width: 253px; float: left"><img class="maxImgWidth" border="0" alt="" width="250" src="http://media.popularmechanics.com/images/WB-11.jpg" /> <br clear="left" />
Rip and crosscut the plywood parts. Clamp a straightedge to the panel and run the saw along it.</div>
<br clear="left" />
<div style="margin-top: 5px">&nbsp;</div>
</div>
<div style="clear: left; padding-top: 5px">
<div style="margin: 5px 5px 5px 1px; width: 253px; float: left"><img class="maxImgWidth" border="0" alt="" width="250" src="http://media.popularmechanics.com/images/WB-12.jpg" /> <br clear="left" />
Use a combination drill/countersink to bore holes in the top and shelf. Clamp these parts in position during this step.</div>
<br clear="left" />
<div style="margin-top: 5px">&nbsp;</div>
</div>
<div style="clear: left; padding-top: 5px">
<div style="margin: 5px 5px 5px 1px; width: 253px; float: left"><img class="maxImgWidth" border="0" alt="" width="250" src="http://media.popularmechanics.com/images/WB-13.jpg" /> <br clear="left" />
Attach the top and shelf using screws driven into each pilot hole. The top of each screw is driven flush to the surface.</div>
<br clear="left" />
<div style="margin-top: 5px">&nbsp;</div>
</div>
<div style="clear: left; padding-top: 5px">
<div style="margin: 5px 5px 5px 1px; width: 253px; float: left"><img class="maxImgWidth" border="0" alt="" width="250" src="http://media.popularmechanics.com/images/WB-14.jpg" /> <br clear="left" />
Crosscut the bench edging. Test fit each piece, then attach with finish nails. Countersink each nailhead.</div>
<br clear="left" />
<div style="margin-top: 5px">&nbsp;</div>
</div>
</div>
<script language="JavaScript" type="text/javascript">
	<!--
	function checkform (form)
	{
	  if (form.commentEmail.value == "") {
	    alert( "Please enter your email address." );
	    form.commentEmail.focus();
	    return (false);
	  } else if (form.comment.value == "") {
	  	alert( "Please enter a comment." );
	  	return (false);
	  } else if (form.blogcaptcha.value == "") {
	  	alert( "Please enter the characters shown in the image below." );
	  	return (false);
	  } else { 
	  	var atLoc = form.commentEmail.value.indexOf('@');
		var dotLoc = form.commentEmail.value.indexOf('.');
		if ((atLoc < 0) || (dotLoc < 0)) {
			alert( "Please enter a valid email address." );
			return(false);
		}
	  } 
	  return (true);
	}
	//-->
</script><br />
<div class="storyCopy">
<p><b>Drawer Construction</b><br />
Bore and countersink appropriate pilot holes in the drawer parts, and screw the drawer box together (Fig. 15). Next, fasten the bottom panel to the drawer box (Fig. 16). Cut the drawer face to length, and fasten it to the front of the drawer box with 1-1/4-in. screws (Fig. 17). We used a bin-style drawer pull (No. 64BP20P from White Chapel, P.O. Box 11719, Jackson, WY 83002; 800-468-5534). For this, or any other surface-mounted pull, bore the appropriate pilot holes, and fasten the pull with screws.</p>
<p>Assemble the drawer support shelf from the remaining plywood parts. It is easiest to clamp the parts together before you bore the pilot holes and drive the screws--especially when you attach the support cleats to the drawer support sides (Fig. 18). Clamp the assembly to the front and back rails, then fasten it with 2-in. No. 8 screws (Fig. 19). Slide the drawer into position on the bench.</p>
<p>For many projects, it is extremely useful to have a vise to hold a workpiece. If you decide to mount one on your bench, position it so that at least two of the mounting holes are directly above the 2 x 4 rails. Mark the hole positions, and bore the pilot holes. Use lagscrews to mount the vise (Fig. 20).</p>
<div style="clear: left; padding-top: 5px">
<div style="margin: 5px 5px 5px 1px; width: 253px; float: left"><img class="maxImgWidth" border="0" alt="" width="250" src="http://media.popularmechanics.com/images/WB-15.jpg" /> <br clear="left" />
Rip and crosscut each piece of the drawer box, and bore pilot holes where needed. Assemble the box with screws.</div>
<br clear="left" />
<div style="margin-top: 5px">&nbsp;</div>
</div>
<div style="clear: left; padding-top: 5px">
<div style="margin: 5px 5px 5px 1px; width: 253px; float: left"><img class="maxImgWidth" border="0" alt="" width="250" src="http://media.popularmechanics.com/images/WB-16.jpg" /> <br clear="left" />
Cut the drawer bottom to size and bore pilot holes. Attach the bottom to the drawer box with screws.</div>
<br clear="left" />
<div style="margin-top: 5px">&nbsp;</div>
</div>
<div style="clear: left; padding-top: 5px">
<div style="margin: 5px 5px 5px 1px; width: 253px; float: left"><img class="maxImgWidth" border="0" alt="" width="250" src="http://media.popularmechanics.com/images/WB-17.jpg" /> <br clear="left" />
Bore holes through the drawer box's front into the drawer face. Attach the drawer face to the box with screws.</div>
<br clear="left" />
<div style="margin-top: 5px">&nbsp;</div>
</div>
<div style="clear: left; padding-top: 5px">
<div style="margin: 5px 5px 5px 1px; width: 253px; float: left"><img class="maxImgWidth" border="0" alt="" width="250" src="http://media.popularmechanics.com/images/WB-18.jpg" /> <br clear="left" />
Assemble the drawer support. Clamp each support cleat in position, and fasten it to the support with screws.</div>
<br clear="left" />
<div style="margin-top: 5px">&nbsp;</div>
</div>
<div style="clear: left; padding-top: 5px">
<div style="margin: 5px 5px 5px 1px; width: 253px; float: left"><img class="maxImgWidth" border="0" alt="" width="250" src="http://media.popularmechanics.com/images/WB-19.jpg" /> <br clear="left" />
Clamp the drawer support cleats in place. Bore pilot holes, and drive screws to attach the cleats to the rails.</div>
<br clear="left" />
<div style="margin-top: 5px">&nbsp;</div>
</div>
<div style="clear: left; padding-top: 5px">
<div style="margin: 5px 5px 5px 1px; width: 253px; float: left"><img class="maxImgWidth" border="0" alt="" width="250" src="http://media.popularmechanics.com/images/WB-20.jpg" /> <br clear="left" />
Place a vise in position on the benchtop, bore its mounting holes, then attach the vise to the top using lagscrews.</div>
<br clear="left" />
<div style="margin-top: 5px">&nbsp;</div>
</div>
</div>
</div>
<p><script language="JavaScript" type="text/javascript">
		<!--
		/* You may give each page an identifying name, server, and channel on the next lines. */
		var s_account="smpopmech"
		
		var s_pageName="Build An Easy Workbench [/home_improvement/furniture/1273396.html]";
		var s_server=location.hostname
		var s_channel="/home_improvement/furniture/"
		var s_pageType=""
		var s_prop1="print"
		/* E-commerce Variables */
		var s_campaign=""
		var s_state=""
		var s_zip=""
		var s_events=""
		var s_products=""
		var s_purchaseID=""
		var s_eVar1=""
		var s_eVar2=""
		
		//-->
		</script><script language="JavaScript1.2" src="http://www.popularmechanics.com/shared/js/s_code.js?r=20060209a" type="text/javascript"></script><img border="0" name="s_i_smpopmech" alt="" width="1" height="1" src="http://smpopmech.112.2o7.net/b/ss/smpopmech/1/G.7-PD-R/s25518778586490?[AQB]&amp;ndh=1&amp;t=9/6/2009%2010%3A19%3A20%204%20-600&amp;pageName=Build%20An%20Easy%20Workbench%20%5B/home_improvement/furniture/1273396.html%5D&amp;g=http%3A//www.popularmechanics.com/home_improvement/furniture/1273396.html%3Fdo%3Dprint&amp;ch=/home_improvement/furniture/&amp;server=www.popularmechanics.com&amp;cc=USD&amp;c1=print&amp;pid=Build%20An%20Easy%20Workbench%20%5B/home_improvement/furniture/1273396.html%5D&amp;pidt=1&amp;oid=javascript%3AdoContent%28%27print%27%2C%271273396%27%2C%27/home_improvement/furniture/1273396.html%27%29%3B&amp;ot=A&amp;oi=273&amp;s=1280x1024&amp;c=32&amp;j=1.3&amp;v=Y&amp;k=Y&amp;bw=1280&amp;bh=868&amp;ct=lan&amp;hp=N&amp;[AQE]" />&nbsp;<noscript></noscript><!--/DO NOT REMOVE/--><!-- End SiteCatalyst code version: G.5. --> <img src="http://media.popularmechanics.com/images/sb_lg_workbenchhires-lg.jpg" alt="" /><script type="text/javascript">
		var gaJsHost = (("https:" == document.location.protocol) ? "https://ssl." : "http://www.");
		document.write(unescape("%3Cscript src='" + gaJsHost + "google-analytics.com/ga.js' type='text/javascript'%3E%3C/script%3E"));
		</script><script type="text/javascript" src="http://www.google-analytics.com/ga.js"></script><script type="text/javascript">
		var pageTracker = _gat._getTracker("UA-6293091-1");
		pageTracker._trackPageview();
		</script></p>]]></description>
		</item>
		
			<item>
			<link>http://www.bluestrait.com/blog/article.asp?id=185</link>
			<title><![CDATA[[转贴] Another cheap and simple but effective bench]]></title>
			<author>bluestrait@gmail.com(黄敏)</author>
			<category><![CDATA[DIY]]></category>
			<pubDate>Mon,06 Jul 2009 16:34:07 +0800</pubDate>
			<guid>http://www.bluestrait.com/blog/default.asp?id=185</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[See the attached pdf file.<img src="http://www.bluestrait.com/blog/images/download.gif" alt="下载文件" style="margin:0px 2px -4px 0px"/> <a href="http://www.bluestrait.com/blog/attachments/month_0907/k200976163424.pdf" target="_blank">点击下载此文件</a><br/>]]></description>
		</item>
		
			<item>
			<link>http://www.bluestrait.com/blog/article.asp?id=184</link>
			<title><![CDATA[[转贴] A Bench for Today&#39;s Woodworker]]></title>
			<author>bluestrait@gmail.com(黄敏)</author>
			<category><![CDATA[DIY]]></category>
			<pubDate>Mon,06 Jul 2009 16:27:06 +0800</pubDate>
			<guid>http://www.bluestrait.com/blog/default.asp?id=184</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[<p>A Bench for Today's Woodworker <!-- *******************END HEADLINE******************** --></p>
<h3><!-- *************Insert AUTHOR TAGLINE HERE**************** --><!-- NOTE: If this article is a collection of excerpts from the messageboard,
replace "by" below with "Excerpts from "--><!-- **************************************************************************** -->by <!-- *****************Insert AUTHOR'S NAME HERE************************ --><!-- NOTE: If this article is a collection of excerpts from the messageboard,
replace Garrett Lambert with "The Message Boards"-->Garrett Lambert <!-- **************************************************************************** --></h3>
<!-- *************BEGIN GRAPHIC TEXT****************
<p><img src="http://www.bluestrait.com/blog//articles/images/500a.jpg" title="" alt="pic" style="width: 350px; height: 262px;" align="left" hspace="15" vspace="10" border="1">
*****************END GRAPHIC TEXT******************* --><!--	*****************BEGIN FRACTION CODE (3/16) TEXT*******************
<font size="-1"><sup>3</sup></font>/<font size="-1">16</font>
*****************END FRACTION CODE TEXT******************* --><!-- *************BEGIN BODY TEXT**************** -->
<p>Like many woodworkers, I suffered from <i>bench envy</i>. I can't count the number of articles and plans I collected, but almost every one was a variation of the traditional joiner's bench with wooden shoulder and tail vises. Nevertheless, I continued to dither rather than build.</p>
<p>Why was I still using my MDF-topped-kitchen-base-cupboard bench that I'd quickly thrown together when we'd moved into a new home? Because sub-consciously I knew that what I wanted wasn't what I needed. In truth, the joiner's bench isn't the most suitable for the way most of us work today. And why should it be? A 19th century joiner would recognize few of the tools and machines we use today. They have evolved to meet changing needs or were invented because of expanded technological possibilities. Since a bench is simply another tool, i.e. a clamping machine, why should it remain frozen in time?</p>
<p>Acknowledging three inescapable conclusions finally got me building:</p>
<ul>
    <li>I use power tools as much or more as hand tools.</li>
    <li>I wanted an all-flat surface rather than a junk-collecting tool tray.</li>
    <li>Innovation has also produced more practical, stronger, and versatile vises than the wooden beauties associated with traditional benches.</li>
</ul>
<p>Those <i>truths</i> finally crystallized in a plan combining the best of old and new, a derivative bench that suits my approach to woodworking. As a bonus, it was easy to build and didn't cost the earth, requiring about 20 pleasant hours in the shop and about $200 for materials. When completed, it also passed an important test&mdash;it calls to me to keep it uncluttered and to work on it.</p>
<p><img title="" border="1" hspace="15" alt="finished bench" vspace="10" align="left" src="http://www.woodcentral.com/articles/images/500a.jpg" style="width: 375px; height: 281px" /></p>
<p>The dimensions will depend on each builder's situation, especially height. Most experts recommend that the top be the distance from the floor to about the beginning of the wrist. However, unless hand tool use is the primary requirement, other objectives can trump that. In my case 70&quot; x 26&quot; x 35&quot; high fits the available space and is &frac14;&quot; lower than the height of my saw table. With a board clamped in the vise and supported on the bench assistant, it serves double duty as a sort of stationary sliding table for my Unisaw. <br clear="all" />
&nbsp;</p>
<p>Whenever possible, I make from what I have, so the base of this bench is from a stock of a few hundred board feet of rough 5/4, kiln dried, hard maple purchased at a very good price several months ago. However, any reasonably dense wood will do, so if you need to buy, look for local bargains. You'll need 30 board feet for the base including a reasonable amount of waste. Not having thick enough stock, I used regular yellow glue to laminate the three layers required to make the 3&quot; x 3&quot; legs, and two layers for the 2&quot; thick upper stretchers.</p>
<p>This bench is a large object that is necessarily strong and heavy to function properly, so I made it easy to disassemble should it ever have to be moved. The frame members go together with <font size="-1"><sup>3</sup></font>/<font size="-1">8</font>&quot; x 6&quot; bolts&mdash;except for the two lower I&quot; thick stretchers where the four bolts are <font size="-1"><sup>5</sup></font>/<font size="-1">16</font>&quot; x 6&quot;&mdash;available from any hardware store (my all-in cost was $10.00).</p>
<p><img title="" border="1" hspace="15" alt="joint detail" vspace="10" align="right" src="http://www.woodcentral.com/articles/images/500b.jpg" style="width: 350px; height: 261px" /></p>
<p>A 1&frac12;&quot; Forstner bit makes the holes to accommodate the fender washers and nyloc nuts, and if you have one, a mortising machine is an easy way to square one end of each hole (I removed the mortiser's vise to provide enough room for the wide boards). Alternatively, it's not difficult to square them off with a mallet and chisel, but either method requires a backer board or cutting in from each face to prevent tearout. A <font size="-1"><sup>1</sup></font>/<font size="-1">8</font>&quot; roundover bit smoothed the edges on both sides.<br clear="all" />
&nbsp;</p>
<p><img title="" border="1" hspace="15" alt="drilling jig" vspace="10" align="left" src="http://www.woodcentral.com/articles/images/500c.jpg" style="width: 350px; height: 262px" /></p>
<p>Before drilling the holes, I had marked center lines to the butt ends of the frames, and that made it easy to transfer the lines to the legs. I made a simple jig to ensure that the matching holes did match, and used a long brad point bit to drill both the legs and the frames. <br clear="all" />
&nbsp;</p>
<p><img title="" border="1" hspace="15" alt="completed base" vspace="10" align="right" src="http://www.woodcentral.com/articles/images/500d.jpg" style="width: 347px; height: 461px" /></p>
<p>It was a treat to assemble them and have everything line up.</p>
<p>I first assembled the end units and then added the two long top and bottom rails. A couple of pieces of 1&quot; maple with square maple pads on each end were used to span the bottom of the legs to act as lower stretchers. The pads were cut to provide the correct final height, and simply screwed on to enable easy replacement in case any height change should become necessary. The extra holes in the first end unit in the photo (right) are for the rods and quick release arm of a Record vise clone.<br clear="all" />
&nbsp;</p>
<p><img title="" border="1" hspace="15" alt="veritas bench top system" vspace="10" align="left" src="http://www.woodcentral.com/articles/images/500e.jpg" style="width: 400px; height: 301px" /></p>
<p>I've never felt the need for a tail vise because I use the Veritas bench top system (left). However, since I had a couple of these vises sitting idle, I installed one &ldquo;just in case&rdquo;. I haven't yet drilled the &frac34;&quot; holes for the Veritas bench top system since I'm still working out the ideal locations.<br clear="all" />
&nbsp;</p>
<p>With the base complete, it was time to make the top. When I went into the garage to pick out enough maple to laminate the required 26 pieces, I spotted a sheet of 1&quot; birch plywood I had earlier purchased on spec for $60. Suddenly, the prospect of laminating only two pieces of plywood seemed a lot more attractive. After cutting the sheet to size and choosing the face, I arranged about ten clamps on either side and a couple on each end of what would be the bottom sheet, quickly spread yellow glue on both surfaces, sandwiched them together, and tightened the clamps. I then flipped it over and drove in about a dozen 1&frac12;&quot; screws down the center line.</p>
<p><img title="" border="1" hspace="15" alt="teimming the top" vspace="10" align="right" src="http://www.woodcentral.com/articles/images/500f.jpg" style="width: 350px; height: 262px" /></p>
<p>With the clamps and screws removed the following day, the alignment of the two sheets was good but not perfect, so I jointed one edge, ripped the other parallel, and used my sled to square the two ends. You can see how the bench helps to support such awkward jobs.</p>
<p>When that was done, I edged the top with 1&quot; of maple and had an excellent working surface. Even so, I have to admit it doesn't feel <i>proper</i> to me, so I'll be making the solid maple top one of these days.<br clear="all" />
&nbsp;</p>
<p>A Record style vise is easy to mount, and doesn't require any overhang. Removing the cotter pin and washer on the end of the rods enables the jaws to be separated from each other (although I had to use a mallet to persuade them to part). If you have an overhang, skip the next step, otherwise, measure carefully and use the end plate to draw the holes on the rail. With a piece of scrap clamped on the backside to avoid tearout, drill them somewhat over-sized with a Forstner bit as per the photo of the end units above. You can then slip the rods through the holes, and with the required spacer in place, lag screw or bolt the rear assembly to the bench and reassemble the parts. However, a more elegant approach would be to mortise the rear jaw into the face of the top.<br clear="all" />
&nbsp;</p>
<p><img title="" border="1" hspace="15" alt="bench with emmert clone" vspace="10" align="left" src="http://www.woodcentral.com/articles/images/500i.jpg" style="width: 350px; height: 262px" /></p>
<p>That said, my current choice for face vise is a Taiwanese clone of the renowned Emmert patternmaker's vise. Although massive with a lot of parts, and weighing more than 60 pounds, simply unscrewing the front jaw breaks it down into a couple of roughly equal pieces to make it much easier to handle. Installing it was far less daunting the second time around. <br clear="all" />
&nbsp;</p>
<p><img title="" border="1" hspace="15" alt="mortising for the rear jaw" vspace="10" align="right" src="http://www.woodcentral.com/articles/images/500g.jpg" style="width: 350px; height: 263px" /></p>
<p>The rear jaw of the vise is mounted to the bench via a large hinged casting that requires a <font size="-1"><sup>3</sup></font>/<font size="-1">8</font>&quot; deep mortise in the bench's top and front. I cut out a piece of scrap the size of the plate to make a template, clamped the half vise in position to mark its edges, and then replaced the vise with the template. A &frac34;&quot; straight pattern bit in a router made short work of it, and I squared off the corners with an inexpensive hinge chisel. A small dovetail saw and some chisel work took care of the front mortise.<br clear="all" />
&nbsp;</p>
<p><img title="" border="1" hspace="15" alt="undercut detail for emmert" vspace="10" align="left" src="http://www.woodcentral.com/articles/images/500h.jpg" style="width: 350px; height: 262px" /></p>
<p>The next job was to undercut the top for the Emmert's short 4&quot; diameter barrel. A tin can about the same diameter provided the arc, and some satisfying mallet and chisel work got rid of the waste quickly. The Emmert's industrial appearance and lack of gentility is balanced by its remarkable flexibility. Note the plies of the baltic birch top and the maple edging visible in this picture.<br clear="all" />
&nbsp;</p>
<p><img title="" border="1" hspace="15" alt="french cleat detail" vspace="10" align="right" src="http://www.woodcentral.com/articles/images/500j.jpg" style="width: 331px; height: 348px" /></p>
<p>To complement the Emmert, I made a bench assistant from a piece of 6&quot; wide maple and ripped a piece of 1&quot; maple to make a <i>French cleat</i> with a 15&deg; bevel. <br clear="all" />
&nbsp;</p>
<p><img title="" border="1" hspace="15" alt="assistant" vspace="10" align="left" src="http://www.woodcentral.com/articles/images/500k.jpg" style="width: 350px; height: 263px" /></p>
<p>With one piece screwed to the face of the upper front stretcher, and a short piece of its mate on the back of the assistant, a spacer block on the back near the bottom holds it vertical by resting against the lower stretcher. The &frac34;&quot; holes accept a Veritas bench dog. When not needed, the assistant lifts off and stores out of the way on the end of the bench, hanging from another piece of the cleat.<br clear="all" />
&nbsp;</p>
<p><img title="" border="1" hspace="15" alt="finished bench" vspace="10" align="right" src="http://www.woodcentral.com/articles/images/500l.jpg" style="width: 350px; height: 262px" /></p>
<p>The finish is a couple of coats of thinned poly as a sealer, sanded to 150, and followed by two coats of buffed Minwax. <br clear="all" />
&nbsp;</p>
<p><img title="" border="1" hspace="15" alt="drawers" vspace="10" align="left" src="http://www.woodcentral.com/articles/images/500m.jpg" style="width: 350px; height: 262px" /></p>
<p>Of course, all that lovely space under the bench is an invitation to storage. About 6-8 months ago, I stopped at a Lee Valley store, and purchased one box each of their stamped metal toolbox trays. For a variety of reasons they were never used for the original project in my wife's sewing room. However, when I came across them again the other day, I realized they would serve well under my bench. I like shallow drawers, because it's so much easier to see and find things. <br clear="all" />
&nbsp;</p>
<p>The instruction sheet that comes with the drawers demonstrates that this is a clever system. Run thin saw cuts in the gables at 1&frac14;&quot; intervals, and you can switch the drawers around to your heart's content. Even better, since my three boxes consisted of five 1&quot;, five 2&quot;, and three 3&quot; trays, they combined to fit exactly in four vertical rows.</p>
<p><img title="" border="1" hspace="15" alt="drawer detail" vspace="10" align="left" src="http://www.woodcentral.com/articles/images/500n.jpg" style="width: 576px; height: 204px" /><br clear="all" />
&nbsp;</p>
<p>Trust me, it works. As you can see in the detail above: four 1&quot; drawers on the top row, four 2&quot; drawers on the second row, the last 1&quot; drawer over the last 2&quot; drawer on the left of the bottom row, and the three 3&quot; drawers to the right in the remaining three slots on the bottom row.</p>
<p>I used some of the 1&quot; birch ply left over from the top for the uprights, and some scrap particle board faced with maple for the case. I set the case in place so that the faces of the drawer pulls were back just enough to provide clearance for the removable bench assistant. <br clear="all" />
&nbsp;</p>
<p>I still have to make four or six wooden drawers to take up the remaining space, but at least I no longer suffer bench envy! <!-- **************END BODY TEXT***************** --><br clear="all" />
<!-- ********************TAG LINE******************* --><!-- NOTE: If this article is a collection of excerpts from the messageboard,
comment out the following DIV tag, including the ellipsis and Garrett Lambert notation.--></p>
<div align="right">. . . <!-- *************Insert AUTHOR'S INFO HERE**************** -->Garrett Lambert</div>]]></description>
		</item>
		
			<item>
			<link>http://www.bluestrait.com/blog/article.asp?id=183</link>
			<title><![CDATA[Workbench Plans]]></title>
			<author>bluestrait@gmail.com(黄敏)</author>
			<category><![CDATA[DIY]]></category>
			<pubDate>Mon,06 Jul 2009 15:43:30 +0800</pubDate>
			<guid>http://www.bluestrait.com/blog/default.asp?id=183</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[<p><a href="http://www.howstuffworks.com/framed.htm?parent=make-workbench.htm&amp;url=http://www.plansnow.com/workbenchplans.html">http://www.howstuffworks.com/framed.htm?parent=make-workbench.htm&amp;url=http://www.plansnow.com/workbenchplans.html</a></p>
<p>
<table border="0" cellspacing="0" bordercolor="#f8f7f3" cellpadding="5" width="747">
    <tbody>
        <tr>
            <td bgcolor="#f8f7f3" valign="top"><img hspace="10" align="left" src="http://images.plansnow.com/workbenches-main.jpg" width="130" height="100" alt="" />
            <h1>Workbench Plans</h1>
            <p>Whether you're a weekend woodworker or a DIY handyman, we have a bench plan for you. Step-by-step plans designed by the editors of <i>Woodsmith</i>, <i>ShopNotes</i>, and <i>Workbench</i> magazines!<br />
            &nbsp;</p>
            </td>
        </tr>
    </tbody>
</table>
<table border="0" cellspacing="0" cellpadding="0" width="747">
    <tbody>
        <tr>
            <td valign="top"><center><strong><font size="2" face="Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif">Weekend Bench</font></strong> </center></td>
            <td valign="top"><strong><font size="2" face="Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif">&nbsp;</font></strong></td>
            <td valign="top"><center><strong><font size="2" face="Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif">Woodsmith Bench</font></strong> </center></td>
            <td valign="top"><strong><font size="2" face="Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif">&nbsp;</font></strong></td>
            <td valign="top"><center><strong><font size="2" face="Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif">Heavy-Duty Bench</font></strong> </center></td>
            <td valign="top"><strong><font size="2" face="Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif">&nbsp;</font></strong></td>
            <td valign="top">
            <div align="center"><strong><font size="2" face="Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif">Custom Shop </font></strong></div>
            </td>
            <td valign="top">&nbsp;</td>
            <td valign="top"><center><strong><font size="2" face="Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif">Wall Workstation</font></strong> </center></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
            <td valign="top"><center><a href="http://www.plansnow.com/wwrkbnch.html"><img border="0" alt="weekend workbench plan" src="http://lib.store.yahoo.net/lib/plansnow/cat-workbench-weekend.gif" width="130" height="99" /><br />
            <img border="0" alt="see this plan" vspace="3" src="http://lib.store.yahoo.net/lib/plansnow/cat-craft-seethisplan.gif" width="110" height="17" /></a> </center></td>
            <td valign="top">&nbsp;</td>
            <td valign="top"><center><a href="http://www.plansnow.com/dn3094.html"><img border="0" alt="Woodsmith workbench plan" src="http://images.plansnow.com/dn3094-mailer.jpg" width="130" height="100" /><br />
            <img border="0" alt="see this plan" vspace="3" src="http://lib.store.yahoo.net/lib/plansnow/cat-craft-seethisplan.gif" width="110" height="17" /></a> </center></td>
            <td valign="top">&nbsp;</td>
            <td valign="top"><center><a href="http://www.plansnow.com/wrkbenchsn.html"><img border="0" alt="heavy-duty workbench plan" src="http://lib.store.yahoo.net/lib/plansnow/cat-workbench-heavy.gif" width="130" height="100" /><br />
            <img border="0" alt="see this plan" vspace="3" src="http://lib.store.yahoo.net/lib/plansnow/cat-craft-seethisplan.gif" width="110" height="17" /></a> </center></td>
            <td valign="top">&nbsp;</td>
            <td valign="top"><center><a href="http://www.plansnow.com/dn3095.html"><img border="0" alt="one-wall workstation plan" src="http://images.plansnow.com/dn3095-mailer-video.jpg" width="130" height="100" /><br />
            <img border="0" alt="see this plan" vspace="3" src="http://lib.store.yahoo.net/lib/plansnow/cat-craft-seethisplan.gif" width="110" height="17" /></a> </center></td>
            <td valign="top">&nbsp;</td>
            <td valign="top"><center><a href="http://www.plansnow.com/dn3091.html"><img border="0" alt="one-wall workstation plan" src="http://images.plansnow.com/dn3091-mailer.jpg" width="130" height="100" /><br />
            <img border="0" alt="see this plan" vspace="3" src="http://lib.store.yahoo.net/lib/plansnow/cat-craft-seethisplan.gif" width="110" height="17" /></a></center></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
            <td valign="top">&nbsp;</td>
            <td valign="top">&nbsp;</td>
            <td valign="top">&nbsp;</td>
            <td valign="top">&nbsp;</td>
            <td valign="top">&nbsp;</td>
            <td valign="top">&nbsp;</td>
            <td valign="top"><center><a href="http://www.plansnow.com/dn3091.html"><br />
            </a></center></td>
            <td valign="top">&nbsp;</td>
            <td valign="top">&nbsp;</td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
            <td valign="top"><center><strong><font size="2" face="Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif">Garage Workcenter</font></strong> </center></td>
            <td valign="top">&nbsp;</td>
            <td valign="top"><center><strong><font size="2" face="Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif">European Bench</font></strong> </center></td>
            <td valign="top">&nbsp;</td>
            <td valign="top"><center><strong><font size="2" face="Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif">Classic Bench</font></strong> </center></td>
            <td valign="top"><strong><font size="2" face="Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif">&nbsp;</font></strong></td>
            <td valign="top"><center><strong><font size="2" face="Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif">Plank Top Bench</font></strong> </center></td>
            <td valign="top">&nbsp;</td>
            <td valign="top"><center><strong><font size="2" face="Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif">Easy-Build Bench</font></strong> </center></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
            <td valign="top"><center><a href="http://www.plansnow.com/dn3111.html"><img border="0" alt="Fold-Down Bench Plan" src="http://images.plansnow.com/dn3111-mailer.jpg" width="130" height="100" /><br />
            <img border="0" vspace="3" src="http://www.workbenchplans.com/plansnow/cat-craft-seethisplan.gif" width="110" height="17" alt="" /></a> </center></td>
            <td valign="top">&nbsp;</td>
            <td valign="top"><center><a href="http://www.plansnow.com/eurobench.html"><img border="0" alt="european style workbench plan" src="http://lib.store.yahoo.net/lib/plansnow/cat-workbench-euro.gif" width="130" height="102" /><br />
            <img border="0" alt="see this plan" vspace="3" src="http://lib.store.yahoo.net/lib/plansnow/cat-craft-seethisplan.gif" width="110" height="17" /></a> </center></td>
            <td valign="top">&nbsp;</td>
            <td valign="top"><center><a href="http://www.plansnow.com/dn3004.html"><img border="0" alt="classic woodworking workbench plan" src="http://lib.store.yahoo.net/lib/plansnow/cat-workbench-classic.gif" width="130" height="100" /><br />
            <img border="0" alt="see this plan" vspace="3" src="http://lib.store.yahoo.net/lib/plansnow/cat-craft-seethisplan.gif" width="110" height="17" /></a> </center></td>
            <td valign="top">&nbsp;</td>
            <td valign="top"><center><a href="http://www.plansnow.com/wbenchplank.html"><img border="0" alt="plank top workbench plan" src="http://lib.store.yahoo.net/lib/plansnow/cat-workbench-planktop.gif" width="130" height="100" /><br />
            <img border="0" alt="see this plan" vspace="3" src="http://lib.store.yahoo.net/lib/plansnow/cat-craft-seethisplan.gif" width="110" height="17" /></a> </center></td>
            <td valign="top">&nbsp;</td>
            <td valign="top"><center><a href="http://www.plansnow.com/dn3072.html"><img border="0" alt="easy-build workbench plan" src="http://lib.store.yahoo.net/lib/plansnow/cat-workbench-easybuild.gif" width="130" height="100" /><br />
            <img border="0" alt="see this plan" vspace="3" src="http://lib.store.yahoo.net/lib/plansnow/cat-craft-seethisplan.gif" width="110" height="17" /></a> </center></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
            <td valign="top">&nbsp;</td>
            <td valign="top">&nbsp;</td>
            <td valign="top">&nbsp;</td>
            <td valign="top">&nbsp;</td>
            <td valign="top">&nbsp;</td>
            <td valign="top">&nbsp;</td>
            <td valign="top">&nbsp;</td>
            <td valign="top">&nbsp;</td>
            <td valign="top">&nbsp;</td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
            <td valign="top"><center><strong><font size="2" face="Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif">Mechanic's Bench</font></strong> </center></td>
            <td valign="top">&nbsp;</td>
            <td valign="top"><center><strong><font size="2" face="Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif">Fold-Down Bench</font></strong> </center></td>
            <td valign="top">&nbsp;</td>
            <td valign="top"><center><strong><font size="2" face="Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif">Small Bench</font></strong> </center></td>
            <td valign="top"><strong><font size="2" face="Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif">&nbsp;</font></strong></td>
            <td valign="top"><center><strong><font size="2" face="Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif">Handyman Bench</font></strong> </center></td>
            <td valign="top">&nbsp;</td>
            <td valign="top"><center><strong><font size="2" face="Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif">Utility Bench</font></strong> </center></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
            <td valign="top"><center><a href="http://www.plansnow.com/wkbmechanic.html"><img border="0" alt="mechanics workbench plan" src="http://lib.store.yahoo.net/lib/plansnow/cat-workbench-mechanic.gif" width="130" height="100" /><br />
            <img border="0" alt="see this plan" vspace="3" src="http://lib.store.yahoo.net/lib/plansnow/cat-craft-seethisplan.gif" width="110" height="17" /></a> </center></td>
            <td valign="top">&nbsp;</td>
            <td valign="top"><center><a href="http://www.plansnow.com/wbenchfold.html"><img border="0" alt="fold down workbench plan" src="http://lib.store.yahoo.net/lib/plansnow/cat-workbench-foldup.gif" width="130" height="100" /><br />
            <img border="0" alt="see this plan" vspace="3" src="http://lib.store.yahoo.net/lib/plansnow/cat-craft-seethisplan.gif" width="110" height="17" /></a><br />
            </center></td>
            <td valign="top">&nbsp;</td>
            <td valign="top"><center><a href="http://www.plansnow.com/smwrkbnch.html"><img border="0" alt="small workbench plan" src="http://lib.store.yahoo.net/lib/plansnow/cat-workbench-small.gif" width="130" height="100" /><br />
            <img border="0" alt="see this plan" vspace="3" src="http://lib.store.yahoo.net/lib/plansnow/cat-craft-seethisplan.gif" width="110" height="17" /></a> </center></td>
            <td valign="top">&nbsp;</td>
            <td valign="top"><center><a href="http://www.plansnow.com/dn3006.html"><img border="0" alt="handyman workbench plan" src="http://lib.store.yahoo.net/lib/plansnow/cat-workbench-handyman.gif" width="130" height="100" /><font color="#333333"> <br />
            <img border="0" alt="see this plan" vspace="3" src="http://lib.store.yahoo.net/lib/plansnow/cat-craft-seethisplan.gif" width="110" height="17" /></font></a> </center></td>
            <td valign="top">&nbsp;</td>
            <td valign="top"><center><a href="http://www.plansnow.com/utwor.html"><img border="0" alt="utility workbench plan" src="http://lib.store.yahoo.net/lib/plansnow/cat-workbench-utility.gif" width="130" height="100" /><br />
            <img border="0" alt="see this plan" vspace="3" src="http://lib.store.yahoo.net/lib/plansnow/cat-craft-seethisplan.gif" width="110" height="17" /></a> </center></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
            <td valign="top">&nbsp;</td>
            <td valign="top">&nbsp;</td>
            <td valign="top">&nbsp;</td>
            <td valign="top">&nbsp;</td>
            <td valign="top">&nbsp;</td>
            <td valign="top">&nbsp;</td>
            <td valign="top">&nbsp;</td>
            <td valign="top">&nbsp;</td>
            <td valign="top">&nbsp;</td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
            <td valign="top"><center><strong><font size="2" face="Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif">Garden Workbench</font></strong> </center></td>
            <td valign="top">&nbsp;</td>
            <td valign="top"><center><strong><font size="2" face="Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif">Potting Bench</font> </strong></center></td>
            <td valign="top">&nbsp;</td>
            <td valign="top"><center><strong><font size="2" face="Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif">Compact Station</font></strong> </center></td>
            <td valign="top">&nbsp;</td>
            <td valign="top"><center><strong><font size="2" face="Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif">Fold-Down Station</font></strong> </center></td>
            <td valign="top">&nbsp;</td>
            <td valign="top"><center><strong><font size="2" face="Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif">Portable Bench</font></strong> </center></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
            <td valign="top"><center><a href="http://www.plansnow.com/pottingbench.html"><img border="0" alt="garden workbench plan" src="http://lib.store.yahoo.net/lib/plansnow/cat-workbench-garden.gif" width="130" height="100" /><br />
            <img border="0" alt="see this plan" vspace="3" src="http://lib.store.yahoo.net/lib/plansnow/cat-craft-seethisplan.gif" width="110" height="17" /></a></center></td>
            <td valign="top">&nbsp;</td>
            <td valign="top"><center><a href="http://www.plansnow.com/gardenproj.html"><img border="0" alt="garden potting bench plan" src="http://lib.store.yahoo.net/lib/plansnow/cat-workbench-potting.gif" width="130" height="100" /><br />
            <img border="0" alt="see this plan" vspace="3" src="http://lib.store.yahoo.net/lib/plansnow/cat-craft-seethisplan.gif" width="110" height="17" /></a></center></td>
            <td valign="top">&nbsp;</td>
            <td valign="top"><center><a href="http://www.plansnow.com/dn3063.html"><img border="0" alt="compact workstation plan" src="http://images.plansnow.com/dn3063-mailer.jpg" width="130" height="100" /><br />
            <img border="0" alt="see this plan" vspace="3" src="http://lib.store.yahoo.net/lib/plansnow/cat-craft-seethisplan.gif" width="110" height="17" /></a></center></td>
            <td valign="top">&nbsp;</td>
            <td valign="top"><center><a href="http://www.plansnow.com/folddown.html"><img border="0" alt="fold-down workbench plan" src="http://www.workbenchplans.com/plansnow-images/dn3035-mailer.jpg" width="130" height="100" /><br />
            <img border="0" alt="see this plan" vspace="3" src="http://lib.store.yahoo.net/lib/plansnow/cat-craft-seethisplan.gif" width="110" height="17" /></a></center></td>
            <td valign="top">&nbsp;</td>
            <td valign="top"><center><a href="http://www.plansnow.com/ptbwb.html"><img border="0" alt="portable workbench plan" src="http://lib.store.yahoo.net/lib/plansnow/cat-workbench-portable.gif" width="130" height="100" /><br />
            <img border="0" alt="see this plan" vspace="3" src="http://lib.store.yahoo.net/lib/plansnow/cat-craft-seethisplan.gif" width="110" height="17" /></a> </center></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
            <td valign="top">&nbsp;</td>
            <td valign="top">&nbsp;</td>
            <td valign="top">&nbsp;</td>
            <td valign="top">&nbsp;</td>
            <td valign="top">&nbsp;</td>
            <td valign="top">&nbsp;</td>
            <td valign="top">&nbsp;</td>
            <td valign="top">&nbsp;</td>
            <td valign="top">&nbsp;</td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
            <td valign="top"><center><strong><font size="2" face="Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif">Plywood Bench</font></strong> </center></td>
            <td valign="top">&nbsp;</td>
            <td valign="top"><center><strong><font size="2" face="Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif">Knock-Down Bench</font></strong> </center></td>
            <td valign="top">&nbsp;</td>
            <td valign="top">&nbsp;</td>
            <td valign="top">&nbsp;</td>
            <td valign="top">&nbsp;</td>
            <td valign="top">&nbsp;</td>
            <td valign="top">&nbsp;</td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
            <td valign="top"><center><a href="http://www.plansnow.com/fiveplywood.html"><img border="0" alt="plywood workbench plan" src="http://lib.store.yahoo.net/lib/plansnow/cat-workbench-plywood.gif" width="130" height="100" /><br />
            <img border="0" alt="see this plan" vspace="3" src="http://lib.store.yahoo.net/lib/plansnow/cat-craft-seethisplan.gif" width="110" height="17" /></a> </center></td>
            <td valign="top">&nbsp;</td>
            <td valign="top"><center><a href="http://www.plansnow.com/dn3082.html"><img border="0" alt="knock-down workbench plan" src="http://www.workbenchplans.com/plansnow-images/dn3082-mailer.jpg" width="130" height="100" /><br />
            <img border="0" alt="see this plan" vspace="3" src="http://lib.store.yahoo.net/lib/plansnow/cat-craft-seethisplan.gif" width="110" height="17" /></a> </center></td>
            <td valign="top">&nbsp;</td>
            <td valign="top">&nbsp;</td>
        </tr>
    </tbody>
</table>
</p>]]></description>
		</item>
		
			<item>
			<link>http://www.bluestrait.com/blog/article.asp?id=80</link>
			<title><![CDATA[【转帖】How to lay Laminate floor]]></title>
			<author>bluestrait@gmail.com(黄敏)</author>
			<category><![CDATA[DIY]]></category>
			<pubDate>Wed,27 Aug 2008 08:36:43 +0800</pubDate>
			<guid>http://www.bluestrait.com/blog/default.asp?id=80</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[A very detailed web site: <br/><br/><a href="http://www.ultimatehandyman.co.uk/laminate_flooring/index.htm?gclid=CNOl_O3PlpUCFQhJagod5k6gPA" target="_blank" rel="external">http://www.ultimatehandyman.co.uk/laminate_flooring/index.htm?gclid=CNOl_O3PlpUCFQhJagod5k6gPA</a>]]></description>
		</item>
		
			<item>
			<link>http://www.bluestrait.com/blog/article.asp?id=66</link>
			<title><![CDATA[【转帖】Building &#34;A&#34; Frame Chicken Coop]]></title>
			<author>bluestrait@gmail.com(黄敏)</author>
			<category><![CDATA[DIY]]></category>
			<pubDate>Fri,15 Aug 2008 09:37:02 +0800</pubDate>
			<guid>http://www.bluestrait.com/blog/default.asp?id=66</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[<div align="center">
<h1><font color="#008000">&quot;A&quot; Frame Chicken Coop</font></h1>
<h2><font color="#000080">by Joe Bonnell</font></h2>
</div>
<div align="center"><img height="206" border="0" align="centre" width="307" alt="A-frame pen" src="http://www.backyardpoultry.com/articles/aframe/GUINEACOPPRO3b.jpg" /></div>
<br />
<strong>List of tools needed.</strong><br />
<br />
<table width="85%">
    <tbody>
        <tr>
            <td>
            <ul>
                <li>Battery powered or 240v Hand drill</li>
                <li>Drill bits, size to suit. For clearance drill use 5mm diameter for 12 Gauge Screws</li>
                <li>Hammer</li>
                <li>Spirit level</li>
                <li>Hexagonal head screw driving bit, size 8mm and magnetic.</li>
                <li>Phillips head screwdriver bits.  Use for Phillips head screws only as required.</li>
                <li>Jig saw</li>
                <li>Circular saw and a cut-off grinding disk to suit metal.</li>
                <li>Measuring tape</li>
                <li>Centre punch</li>
                <li>Wood chisel</li>
                <li>Pencil</li>
                <li>Adjustable Bevel Square or Protractor</li>
                <li>Hex head wood screws to suit.</li>
                <li>About 9 meters of 8mm or 10mm rope</li>
                <li>Leather gloves</li>
                <li>Appropriate safety clothes and safety equipment. <em><u>Do not skimp on safety gear.</u></em></li>
            </ul>
            <br />
            <br />
            <strong>Introduction to construction. </strong>
            <p>It is recommended to use treated pine timber for white ant and rot resistance. Treated hardwood can be used almost as easily but it is much heavier. <em>Do not use treated timber if this structure is to be used for parrots.</em></p>
            <p>The timber for the main &quot;A&quot; frame struts are cut from 75mm x 38mm x 3M lengths. The next larger size, 75mm x 50mm may be easier to use but it is more expensive. The frame I built was constructed from 75mm x 50mm hardwood. Most of the timber can be cut to length for you at the store so you can transport it easier. The material list given allows a little extra length so you can trim to exact shape and size at home. The corrugated iron, Custom orb, is bought as a standard length. The ridge capping and corner molding is cut from a flat sheet of Galvanised iron and formed at a local sheet metal shop. This gal. iron might only come in a 2.4M x 1.2M sheet and some waste may occur. It is far cheaper to buy the entire sheet and keep the off-cuts for later use. Check out the local sheet metal workshops and hardware supplies for corner flashing that can be substituted if possible. The 60 degree ridge capping will need to be cut and formed at a sheet metal shop as it is a non-standard shape.</p>
            <p>When drilling the holes for all the screws, drill only one piece of the timber to form a snug fit for the screw to pass through. Assemble the joint, fit a screw into the hole and screw the two parts together using an electric drill with the appropriate attachment. Practice this first on some scrap pieces that will be used for the structure. If the wood that the screw is being driven into, cracks or splits, a small hole will need to be drilled into the wood to allow the screw to penetrate. This hole size is the diameter of the screw measured in the bottom of the screw threads, ie, the smallest diameter of the threaded shank and can be a little smaller than this when pine is used. Where a screw is driven into a hardwood part, a pilot hole must be drilled to allow the screw to screw into the timber. <em>If a pilot hole is not drilled in hardwood,</em> the end of the strut or beam etc, will split. Take care when drilling the holes, a broken drill is very difficult to remove. When drilling the holes, run the drill at high speed.</p>
            <br />
            <a href="http://www.backyardpoultry.com/articles/aframe/aframe2.pdf" target="_blank">CLICK HERE - for Building Plans in PDF format (1530KB)</a> - This will take a while to load<br />
            <br />
            <strong>Building Instructions</strong>
            <p>Cut the A-frame struts to length and mark out the angles at the ends using the full size templates as a guide. Cut the angles at the ends to shape, all the cutting can be performed with a hand saw, a jig saw or with a circular saw. If using a circular saw, mark out the ends at the bottom of the frame strut on both sides . Cut along the side of the lines and stop when the blade comes to the edge of the line. Turn the wood over and cut as before. The unwanted wood will need to be cut out from the end with a hand saw and the excess trimmed with a chisel or a hand saw. Try not to undercut the corners with the circular power saw as this will seriously weaken the strut. The best saw for this job is a jig saw.</p>
            <p>Cut the gussets that hold the 2 struts together and drill the 6 holes in each one for the screws. These holes are the same diameter as the screws. Spread the struts apart on a flat surface and check that the width measurement is 2625mm as shown in Sheet 4. A difference of plus or minus 10 mm can be tolerated as the struts will flex a bit but aim to keep to the stated dimensions. Fit an off-cut (its just a temporary spacer) from the ridge beam into the gap at the top of the frame and position the gusset as shown (Sheet 4). Screw the gusset onto the struts. Make sure the length of the top beam will allow for an off-cut to be taken from it. Complete all 6 frames to this stage. Pick one and carefully lay it flat on the ground, this will become the entrance end of the coop. Place the bottom beam in position and fasten in place. The joint is secured with wood screws obtained from your favorite hardware shop. Cut and fasten the door jambs and the noggin that supports them and fit the top beam above the doorway.</p>
            <p>The frame at the other end is made exactly the same way. Make sure that the gusset at the top is facing the inside of the frame. Fasten the bottom beam and then screw the 2 cross struts in place as shown on Sheet 3. When the frame is finished, the outside surface of the frame will be flush all over. A flush surface is needed to screw the Custom orb onto. Use standard roofing screws with neoprene seals to fasten the iron. Mark out the position of all the frames on the two side beams that hold the frames. Check the location of all the screw holes before commencing any drilling. Drill all the screw holes to suit the screws. Lay the side beams out where the coop will be positioned and make sure that the beams are level, one across to the other and are at the same height. You may need to dig some soil away to set these beams correctly. Position the rear frame vertically in place on the side beams and hold in position with a rope tied to the top of the frame and tied off on pegs driven in place as shown Sheet 9. Slide the 100 x 25 top beam into place and support the free end with a prop. Make sure the A-Frame strut is vertical and is square to the 2 side beams on the ground. Check that the end frame is level by placing a spirit level along the middle of the bottom beam. Screw the two side beams to the frame. To check for squareness, measure the distance the two side beams are spaced at each end to get them parallel. Measure the length of the two diagonals, ie. from one corner across to the other corner on the opposite side. Adjust the position of the side beams by sliding one or the other lengthways until both diagonals are the same length. Try and get these diagonals within 5mm, it's not hard to achieve. Position all the remaining A-Frames and screw in place. Screw the top beam to all the A-Frames. The structure will be rather unsteady but it will soon become reasonably rigid when the noggins for the iron sheets are fitted and screwed in place. Total rigidity is obtained when the iron is fastened onto the frame sides. A strip of timber can be nailed or clamped from the bottom corner at the front of the frame to the top corner at the other end or as high as you can reach to support the structure as it is being assembled. Nail this strip temporarily to each frame.</p>
            <p>Cut and fit the noggin that holds the custom orb sheeting and screw it between the frames as shown. Measure the space between the frames to be certain of the correct length of each piece There are eight pieces needed for each side. The fitting of these pieces will greatly stiffen the structure. Check all the dimensions and the integrity of the screwed joints. You can leave making the door to the very last. It is essential that the frames be as square as possible to the base beams after they are erected and fastened and are aligned parallel to each other. This alignment and squareness will be greatly appreciated when you fit the wire mesh onto the frame. All the hard part is now completed.</p>
            <p><strong>DANGER,</strong> THIS NEXT OPERATION CAN CAUSE SEVERE CUTS TO THE HANDS AND BODY. WEAR SUITABLY PROTECTIVE CLOTHING AND LEATHER GLOVES BEFORE STARTING THIS PROCEDURE. YOUR PERSONAL SAFETY IS YOUR OWN RESPONSIBILITY.</p>
            <p>Lay a 2.7 meter length of custom orb against the frame and support it so the top edge is flush with the edge of the top beam. The bottom of the sheet should be about 55 mm to 60 mm above the ground and/or hanging over the top edge of the side beam on the ground by about 45 mm. This sheet is fastened to the end bay of the framework. Screw only four screws into this sheet to hold it in position. Do the same on the opposite side. One screw is fitted in the center of the sheet at the bottom, another in the center at the top to the noggin. The remaining two screws are fitted into the noggin at the edge of the sheet next to the end frame. See drawing Sheet 9 of 11 Lay the second sheet over the remaining space and under the edge of the first sheet. The sharp edge of the second sheet should lay down along the edge of the &quot;A&quot; frame strut. It will be ok. If the sheet overhangs the strut but try and fit it so it is flush. Take this second sheet away and store safely.</p>
            <p>Now lay the chosen wire mesh over the framework as shown in sheet 6. The edge of the wire will cover the edge of the strut and the iron will overlap on the timber and cover the wire and the staples that fasten it. The opposite edge of the wire should now be aligned along the centerline of the adjacent strut. The wire mesh can overlap here if needed. The spacing of the frames was determined by using wire mesh that measures 900 mm wide. This saves cutting the wire to size and is easier and safer on the fingers. Placement of the wire in this manner will give you a completed coop with no horizontal joins in the wire mesh. The wire mesh is continued over the top of the frame and down to the bottom beam on the other side as one length. There are no joins at the top of the framework. When this initial panel of wire has been fastened to both sides, the remaining custom orb is now screwed to the framework. Fasten the corrugated iron to each horizontal noggin with standard roofing screws. It helps to center punch the position of the screws on the custom orb. To drive the screws in, fit the hex head screwdriver into the electric drill, fit a screw to the magnet and position the point in the center punch mark. The screw will drill its own hole and screw into the wood. The lower edge of the iron is fastened at every second corrugation and the same at the top. The remaining sections are fastened every fourth corrugation and at the edges</p>
            <p>The two outer edges of the custom orb sheets should be flush with the edges of the two frames as shown. Mark out all the centre lines of the noggin across both sheets with a felt pen. Center punch the corrugations where the holes are, screw a roofing screw fastener through the iron and into the noggin. See sheet 9 of 11 for details. NOTE: The screws are located at the TOP of the corrugations, NOT at the bottom in the valleys</p>
            <p>CAUTION. Be carefull that the custom orb is not flattened or squashed by over driving the power drill. If the custom orb is deformed it will spread out wider than the frames and will need to be adjusted by backing off and/or removing the screws. If the sheets are satisfactorily positioned, screw in the remaining roofing screws. The structure will now be absolutely rigid.</p>
            <p>Place another sheet of custom orb against the back of the end frame and support the sheet to match the height of the others. Mark out the line where the sheet will be cut on the angle using a straight edge to guide the felt pen.</p>
            <p><strong>DANGER,</strong> THIS NEXT OPERATION CAN CAUSE SEVERE CUTS TO THE HANDS AND BODY. WEAR SUITABLY PROTECTIVE CLOTHING, SAFETY GLASSES AND LEATHER GLOVES BEFORE STARTING THIS PROCEDURE. YOUR PERSONAL SAFETY IS YOUR OWN RESPONSIBILITY.</p>
            <p>Cut the sheet along this line. The best way to cut this is with a circular saw fitted with a cut-off grinding disk. Lay the sheet on the ground (NOT ON CONCRETE) and cut along the line. Remove the sharp burrs carefully with a file or disk sander and fasten to the end wall. Mark out and cut the remaining panels. The sheets will need to be joggled to fit together but the cut parts will fit. The end wall can be covered using only two sheets of custom orb. Check all the walled surfaces for missing screws and add them if needed. Fit the galvanized sheet steel corner sheets to the frame. These finish off the outer corners and seal the end of the coop from the weather. They also cover the pointed ends of the end wall sheet pieces and form a covered safe edge on the corners. Cover the remaining spaces with the wire mesh and cover the front entry framework. Fit the ridge capping and all the hard work is now complete.</p>
            <p>Make up the door, Check the dimensions of the width and height so that there is about a 4mm or 5mm space all around the frame. Cover with wire and fit the hinges. The best hinges are &quot;Tee&quot; hinges. The door can swing either inwards or outwards. Inwards might be better as it may offer more security when you enter the coop. Lastly, fit a latch and your done. Now go and make yourself a big glass of iced coffee and open the chocolate . All the interior fixings can now be made to your own requirements.</p>
            <p>Our &quot;A&quot; frame coop is made from hardwood. It is very heavy and solid. The completed frame simply sits on the ground, there are no stumps or anchor points. It has withstood wind gusts of over 80 kph and has never moved or flexed. If you are concerned that a wind storm could overturn the structure, it can be fastened to wooden stumps sunk into the ground as needed or bolted onto a concrete slab. The custom orb can be painted to suit your locality if desired. If you erect the frame amongst trees and bush, a gum leaf green may be just the colour required to blend it into the landscape.</p>
            <p>If you have any questions regarding the construction don't hesitate to contact me at <a href="http://www.bluestrait.com/blog/mailto:wedgetails@optusnet.com.au">wedgetails@optusnet.com.au</a></p>
            <p>May you enjoy building your &quot;A&quot; frame as much as I have when I built mine. I'm sure your chookies will love it.</p>
            </td>
        </tr>
    </tbody>
</table>]]></description>
		</item>
		
			<item>
			<link>http://www.bluestrait.com/blog/article.asp?id=61</link>
			<title><![CDATA[DIY家庭布线工程 8 注意事项]]></title>
			<author>bluestrait@gmail.com(黄敏)</author>
			<category><![CDATA[DIY]]></category>
			<pubDate>Thu,07 Aug 2008 12:41:39 +0800</pubDate>
			<guid>http://www.bluestrait.com/blog/default.asp?id=61</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[<strong>线材的选择</strong><br/>1. 网线: CAT5E vs. CAT6<br/>CAT5E理论上也可以支持Gigabit 网络。很多cabler为了省钱往往在gigabit网络上使用CAT5E。这点你如果是请人来铺线的话应该问清楚。为了future-proof，还是上CAT6比较明智。<br/><br/>注意CAT6线中间多了一根似乎为支撑作用的塑料芯，因此比CAT5E的线硬朗许多，不象cat5e那样柔软易弯曲，铺设时难度稍高一些。<br/><br/>2. 电视线: RG59 vs. RG6<br/>就如CAT5E vs. CAT6一样，两者都可以用。但是RG59是上一代的电视线标准，信号屏蔽性能，可承受的传输数据量都不如新一代的RG6. 所以建议还是使用RG6。<br/>另外选择线材时还要考虑屏蔽层(shielding, ，有时也叫screening)的问题。较好的线材应该使用四层屏蔽层 (quad-shielding)，这样受干扰的可能性较小。<br/><br/><strong>线材的制作和连接</strong><br/>可能很多人都注意到了本文中没有提到线材的制作和连接。比如<br/>- 如何在RG6上安装F Connector；<br/>- 如何连接RG6和相应的F Type ins&#101;rt (面板);<br/>- 如何在CAT6上安装Rj45水晶头；<br/>- 如何连接CAT6和相应的RJ45 ins&#101;rt(面板);<br/>- 如何连接电话线和rj12头；<br/>- 如何制作rj12到rj45的电话线等等。<br/><br/>其原因是本文的着重点在于帮助您了解居民房子的结构和走线时可能遇到的问题。如果您决意去DIY布线，以上列出的这些线材相关的问题是您必须要掌握的基本技术，所以本文就没有提及了。如果您觉得有需要的话，请和我联系，我会考虑是否另文再和各位讨论。<br/><br/><strong>铺线注意事项</strong><br/>1. 网线和电视线都是弱电，它们之间的干扰性微乎其微，完全可以忽略。所以你尽可以把它们绑在一起，不用担心它们之间的干扰问题。<br/>2. 出于安全和干扰因素的考虑， 它们都应该尽量避开强电线路，也就是家用的220V电线。一般建议保持50cm距离。如果实在要相交，应尽量保持垂直角度。<br/>3. 如果可能的话，考虑使用塑料或金属导管来容纳网线和电视线，以减少冷热潮湿的侵袭，以及小动物可能造成的损害。<br/><br/><strong>安全事项</strong><br/>“不怕一万，就怕万一。” <br/><br/>1. 上屋顶要穿软底防滑鞋。下雨天或屋顶潮湿时，绝对不要上。上下梯子时一定要确保固定好梯子或找人在旁边看着。我自己就有一次在一个人雨天上房顶后，准备下来时，一只脚已经踏上梯子。这是因为地面湿滑的缘故，梯子突然移开，我几乎就摔下来。至今仍有后怕。<br/><br/>2. 隔热原料可能对人身体尤其肺部有损害。所以在阁楼(attic)内要戴护目镜（Goggle)，口罩(mask)，手套(work glove)，穿长袖衣裤，长筒袜和鞋子，裤腿扎好。<br/><br/>护目镜，口罩，手套都可以在hardware store比如Bunnings买到。&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<br/><br/>3. 在墙内走线时，一定要事先检查预定的线路周围有没有其它现存的线路。这些线路包括电线，电话，报警线路等等，此外还有水管和煤气。这些当你在墙上钻孔开洞时尤其要小心。显然，如果附近有电路插座，那么附近就有电线。尽可能避开这些地方吧。<br/><br/>就算附近没有插座，也不可掉以轻心。请使用yellow tongue轻轻的插入墙内来检查周围的情况。<br/><br/>总而言之，安全绝不是嘴上说说而已的。如果你不是很确认你在做什么，还是找个专业人士来做吧。<br/><br/><strong>法律因素</strong><br/>就我所做过的研究而言，家里的DIY局域网的合法性似乎一直是一个灰色地带：在whirlpool论坛上是争论不休的一个话题。有的说合法，有的说不行，更有人声称DIY网络如果造成事故（火灾的话）可能在保险索赔时会造成麻烦。反正各执一词，不知听谁的好。不过我个人的看法是：在澳洲这样一个崇尚个人自由和DIY的地方，如果一个人在自己家里都不能动一动这些没有什么安全威胁性的弱电的话，那还谈得上什么自由？<br/><br/>各位看官自己看着办吧。由此DIY行为引发责任，恕不负责，还请见谅。<br/><br/>附照片：<br/><br/>护目镜，口罩，手套，耳塞<br/><img src="http://www.bluestrait.com/bluegallery/pictures/2007_11_cabling/IMG_0579_m.JPG" border="0" alt=""/><br/><br/>工作照 :-)<br/><img src="http://www.bluestrait.com/bluegallery/pictures/2007_11_cabling/IMG_0567_m.JPG" border="0" alt=""/><br/><br/>Male RG6 Crimp type F connector, 用于RG6<br/><img src="http://www.bluestrait.com/bluegallery/pictures/2007_11_cabling/IMG_0582_m.JPG" border="0" alt=""/><br/><br/>Rotary Coax Stripper 和 Hex Rachet Crimping Tool, 用于安装F connector到RG6上<br/><img src="http://www.bluestrait.com/bluegallery/pictures/2007_11_cabling/IMG_0584_m.JPG" border="0" alt=""/><br/><br/><a href="http://www.bluestrait.com/blog/article.asp?id=60" rel="external">DIY家庭布线工程 7 主要花费清单</a>]]></description>
		</item>
		
			<item>
			<link>http://www.bluestrait.com/blog/article.asp?id=60</link>
			<title><![CDATA[DIY家庭布线工程 7 主要花费清单]]></title>
			<author>bluestrait@gmail.com(黄敏)</author>
			<category><![CDATA[DIY]]></category>
			<pubDate>Thu,07 Aug 2008 12:38:34 +0800</pubDate>
			<guid>http://www.bluestrait.com/blog/default.asp?id=60</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[附上主要花费清单，也可帮助各位了解需要哪些主要工具及材料。<br/><br/><img src="http://www.bluestrait.com/bluegallery/pictures/Misc/cabling_cost.JPG" border="0" alt=""/><br/><br/>主要供货商：Altronics (<a target="_blank" href="http://www.bluestrait.com/blog/www.altronics.com.au" rel="external">www.altronics.com.au</a>), Bunnings, Jaycar (<a target="_blank" href="http://www.bluestrait.com/blog/www.jarcar.com.au" rel="external">www.jarcar.com.au</a>). Altronics尤其推荐，非常友好，帮我照单提货，还打了一个大大的折扣。在我一个礼拜跑了4趟他们在Princess Highway (Melbourne)的门市部之后，已经被误当成了一个 trady 对待。呵呵<br/><br/><a href="http://www.bluestrait.com/blog/article.asp?id=59" rel="external">DIY家庭布线工程 6 扩展电话网络</a><br/><a href="http://www.bluestrait.com/blog/article.asp?id=61" rel="external">DIY家庭布线工程 8 注意事项</a>]]></description>
		</item>
		
			<item>
			<link>http://www.bluestrait.com/blog/article.asp?id=59</link>
			<title><![CDATA[DIY家庭布线工程 6 扩展电话网络]]></title>
			<author>bluestrait@gmail.com(黄敏)</author>
			<category><![CDATA[DIY]]></category>
			<pubDate>Thu,07 Aug 2008 12:34:58 +0800</pubDate>
			<guid>http://www.bluestrait.com/blog/default.asp?id=59</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[在试用了一个月的网络后, 发现了一些不足, 所以又忙活了4个小时, 主要工作包括扩展现有电话网络和在主卧内安装网络点<br/><br/>本来房子里已有电话分机/线两部, 一个在餐厅和family area之间, 另一个在楼下rumpus. 问题在于: <br/>- 餐厅的电话接头使用的是最古老的telstra的610socket, 而且都已经从墙上掉出来了,相当丑陋。同时该出口附近还没有电源插座, 为了安装ADSLmodem和无线电话主机，只能从其他地方引一根插线板到那。此外还要专门放个小桌子在那儿以放电话和modem, wireless router.结果电话线网线电源线经常被我的一岁大的小家伙扯出来玩。所以必须要另选地方, 最好是电话主机安装到客厅,而modem安装到楼下储藏室的网线汇集处. <br/>- 同时我手上只有一个adsl central filter, 目前装在楼上的分机处, 结果楼下分机打电话时的由modem引起的杂音很大. 需要想办法将central filter安装到电话最初的进入房子的分线处。<br/>- 检查发现在Telstra进入房子的电话线的安装点(在屋顶的attic内)，原房主是手工接了两根分线。其接口处直接用绝缘胶布将线头马马虎虎的绑上。日久越长, 金属线头都已经露出来了, 惨不忍睹。时可忍孰不可忍！:-)<br/>- 研究表明，未来电话线的发展方向是使用CAT5/6线材，和RJ45接口。实际上Telstra现在新装电话线路都是这样了。所以决定趁此机会将电话网络升级成CAT5网络。<br/><br/>开工吧!<br/>1. 在电话分线处拆下现有的电话分线, telstra进入的电话线是传统的four core (red, yellow,green,black四种颜色)电话线.&nbsp;&nbsp;买了一个rj12出口的接线盒6p4c Modular Skirt Board Socket, <br/><img src="http://www.altronics.com.au/images/prod/P/P7060.gif" border="0" alt=""/><br/>拆开后将电话线按正确的颜色固定在其内的固线柱上.&nbsp;&nbsp;现在我们有一个标准的rj12口了. <br/><br/>2. 使用一根普通的两头rj12的电话线将adsl central filter连上了电话线 (line)。<br/><br/>3. 从central filter的modem端接了一根事先做好的极短的一头rj12一头rj45的电话线。<br/><img src="http://www.altronics.com.au/images/prod/P/P7062.gif" border="0" alt=""/><br/>该线又连接到一个rj45连接器(RJ45 Coupler) 上, <br/><img src="http://www.altronics.com.au/images/prod/P/P7048.gif" border="0" alt=""/><br/>然后再连上一根普通的cat5e线上直通储藏室. 这根线在储藏室内又通过rj45coupler, rj45-rj12电话线, 最终连接到我的adsl modem上. <br/><br/>4. 在filter的电话端 (phone)通过串联的方法安装了两个一分二的转接头6p4c Modular Double Adapter,<br/><img src="http://www.altronics.com.au/images/prod/P/P7050.gif" border="0" alt=""/><br/>以提供三根电话分线.然后将现有的两根线安上rj12水晶头后连上.同时又通过使用类似前面rj12到rj45转接的方法在第三根分线上接上了一根cat5e线,这根弦最后链接到了客厅, 出口和已有的两根cat6,两根rj6在一起, 为此目的还将原本客厅安装好的4port的面板换成了5口的. <br/><br/>5. 同时将餐厅的原有旧式620电话接口拆掉, 安装上一个rj45ins&#101;rt, 最后安装上一个单口的面板固定在墙上. 然后拿走原有的插线板, 现在房间里看起来整洁多了. <br/><br/>6. 我的wireless router需要直接连到adsl modem上,但是又要留在楼上(因为大部分时候我家的无线设备都在楼上使用).为此, 使用了一根在客厅已经安装好的cat6(如果你还记得的话,我有两根cat6在此) , 将router和 modem连接起来.<br/><br/><br/>7. 在客厅里使用rj12到rj45的电话线连上电话, 拿起话筒, 听到了熟悉的拨号音, 大功告成! <br/><br/><strong>主卧房</strong><br/>最后终于决定还是在主卧房通上电视和网线. 毕竟躺在床上看电视时多么令人神往的一件事啊. 到储藏间一看才,&nbsp;&nbsp;意识到我的两百米rg6线已经消耗殆尽, 只够最后再走一根了. 所以偷了一点懒，铺了一根cat6加一根rg6了事。现在就欠 … 一台电视了。<br/><br/><a href="http://www.bluestrait.com/blog/article.asp?id=58" rel="external">DIY家庭布线工程 5 &#34;凿壁术&#34;</a><br/><a href="http://www.bluestrait.com/blog/article.asp?id=60" rel="external">DIY家庭布线工程 7 主要花费清单</a>]]></description>
		</item>
		
			<item>
			<link>http://www.bluestrait.com/blog/article.asp?id=58</link>
			<title><![CDATA[DIY家庭布线工程 5 &#34;凿壁术&#34;]]></title>
			<author>bluestrait@gmail.com(黄敏)</author>
			<category><![CDATA[DIY]]></category>
			<pubDate>Thu,07 Aug 2008 11:10:58 +0800</pubDate>
			<guid>http://www.bluestrait.com/blog/default.asp?id=58</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[<strong>如何在plaster墙上开孔？</strong><br/>答案非常简单： 你只需要一把drywall saw (aka Gyprock Saw)。使用时用尖的一端直接在选定地方捅出一个洞， 然后利用锯面锯出合适的大小即可。 参看下图：<br/><img src="http://www.bluestrait.com/bluegallery/pictures/2007_11_cabling/img_0790_m.jpg" border="0" alt=""/><br/><br/>我使用的是一把Stanley的drywallsaw，$15 from bunnings。有人建议一把锋利的工具刀（utilityknife)也可以完成相同的任务。但是我的个人经验发现并不好使，不推荐。 注意如果这面墙是外墙，透过开的洞，你应该可以看到隔热层（铝箔）。记得你的线是在铝箔外面吗，所以你还得在铝箔上再开一个洞这样才能看到从顶上放下的yellow tongue，从而将yellow tongue拽出来。<br/><br/>开好了孔，拉出了线，下一步就是考虑安装面板了。<br/><br/>面板就是我们平时在墙上看到的这些方方正正的塑料板， 上面可能有电源插口，天线插口，电话插口等等。这些面板的尺寸一般都是标准统一的, 其上有孔, 可以安装各种不同类型的connector/ins&#101;rt, 比如cat5/6, rg6, RCA, 甚至HDMI, USB,VGA等等。注意虽然面板大小在不同厂商之间是一样的, 但是其上的ins&#101;rt的设计就可能各有不同,所以购买面板和ins&#101;rts时要注意他们之间是否兼容. 市面上常见质量较好的牌子有HPM, Clipsal等等. 我这次用的都是HPM的,见下图:<br/><img src="http://www.bluestrait.com/bluegallery/pictures/Misc/IMG_0489_1024.JPG" border="0" alt=""/><br/><br/>图中右边白色的两个部件就是是我要安装的面板。可以看到面板上有四个孔, 将分别安装两个 RG6, 两个CAT6 ins&#101;rts。另外还可以看到其上四周有一些小的孔,它们是用来上螺丝以固定在墙上用的。螺丝孔的位置和各种后面要提到的装在墙内的bracket或ElectronicWallbox配套。实际安装中一般只会用到其中的两个螺丝孔。具体哪两个就要看你用的bracket/electronicbox是哪种。一般面板会自带两个长的螺丝。这两个螺丝用来将面板固定在bracket上. 此外如图所见,我这次选择的面板还自带一个外套。在面板上安装完ins&#101;rts, 上完螺丝固定到墙上后可以将其扣在面板上, 以达到更美观的视觉效果。<br/><br/>因为plaster墙内是空心的,所以ins&#101;rts的主体可以放在墙内，面板可以装成紧贴墙体。其固定方法就是使用上图左面的plaster bracket。照片中可以看见bracket下端有两个钩状突出，这是用来卡在plaster板上做固定用途的。<br/><br/>安装时要做的是首先按照本章开始所讲的方法在plaster墙上选定的出口处开好洞。洞的大小很重要，它应该大到足以左右机动放入bracket，同时又要小于braket的完整尺寸，否则bracket的上下左右两端可能无法扣住plaster 板。见下图：<br/><img src="http://www.bluestrait.com/bluegallery/pictures/2007_11_cabling/img_0789_m.jpg" border="0" alt=""/><br/><br/>下图所示是bracket已经放进了洞内，bracket下部两个钩子和左右两端同时卡在了plaster板上。图中还可以看到bracket左右两端的螺丝孔没有被遮挡。这样的话面板的固定螺丝才可以旋入孔内从而固定面板。<br/><img src="http://www.bluestrait.com/bluegallery/pictures/2007_11_cabling/img_0788_m.jpg" border="0" alt=""/><br/><br/>安装好bracket后，将事先连接好了线的ins&#101;rts插入面板（现在的一般都是clip-in机制的，扣入即可），再通过面板或bracket 附带的两个螺丝将面板固定在bracket上就万事大吉了。<br/><br/>下图：安装好ins&#101;rt的RG6和CAT6<br/><img src="http://www.bluestrait.com/bluegallery/pictures/2007_11_cabling/img_0791_m.jpg" border="0" alt=""/><br/><br/>下图: 完工的面板<br/><img src="http://www.bluestrait.com/bluegallery/pictures/Misc/img_0529_1024.jpg" border="0" alt=""/><br/><br/>上面说将的墙是Plaster墙，也就是plaster板覆盖的空心墙。还有一种墙是砖墙。在砖墙上安装面板的方法就不一样了。<br/><br/><strong>如何在砖墙上安装面板</strong><br/>由于各种ins&#101;rt都有一定的长度，所以要求面板后面有一定空间才能容纳它们。对于空心墙来说不是问题，因为墙体内部或者是空的，或者是填了软的 insulataion 材料。对于砖墙来说就是个问题了， 因为要在现有的砖墙上挖个大坑出来一来有难度，二来也担心造成安全隐患。所以在砖墙上我们要用到electrical wall box. 看下图：<br/><img src="http://www.bluestrait.com/bluegallery/pictures/Misc/IMG_0576%20%28Custom%29.JPG" border="0" alt=""/><br/>照片中左上角可以看到已经用两根螺丝安装在墙上的wall box。这堵墙表面贴了一层木墙板，墙板后面是一道砖墙，没有空隙可以容纳ins&#101;rts。砖墙隔壁是储藏室，为了引线，我在墙上的两块砖缝间的填充料 (mortal)用冲击钻开了一道足够大的孔以让线通过。从照片中你还可以看到拉出四根线中的三根已经分别连上了ins&#101;rt，并且扣在了面板上。照片的右下角你还可以看到 用到的工具：包括冲击钻，power screwdriver (上螺丝), chisels（凿子？用来平整木板）等等。 <br/><br/>将面板固定在wall box上市非常简单的一件事，直接用面板附带的螺丝直接拧上即可。不需要bracket了。下面是完工后的照片：<br/><img src="http://www.bluestrait.com/bluegallery/pictures/Misc/IMG_0577%20%28Custom%29.JPG" border="0" alt=""/><br/><br/>注意wall box有不同深度，所以购买时要注意买到其深度足以容纳你用到的ins&#101;rts。但是其长宽大小是标准尺寸的，所以可以安装任意品牌的面板。<br/><br/><a href="http://www.bluestrait.com/blog/article.asp?id=57" rel="external">DIY家庭布线工程 4 &#34;穿墙术&#34;</a><br/><a href="http://www.bluestrait.com/blog/article.asp?id=59" rel="external">DIY家庭布线工程 6 扩展电话网络</a>]]></description>
		</item>
		
			<item>
			<link>http://www.bluestrait.com/blog/article.asp?id=57</link>
			<title><![CDATA[DIY家庭布线工程 4 &#34;穿墙术&#34;]]></title>
			<author>bluestrait@gmail.com(黄敏)</author>
			<category><![CDATA[DIY]]></category>
			<pubDate>Thu,07 Aug 2008 11:06:18 +0800</pubDate>
			<guid>http://www.bluestrait.com/blog/default.asp?id=57</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[<strong>如何将网线从阁楼下放至楼上的的各个房间的墙内?</strong><br/>通过网上的研究, 实地的调查, 和对建筑业的朋友的谘询, 我得到了以下了解:<br/>这边的墙有内墙和外墙之分. 内墙是指房间之间用来分割的墙, 外墙自然就是直接和外面接触到的墙了. <br/><br/>内墙的结构在澳洲一般是这样: 两边都是plaster板 (石膏板?), 中间由木条支撑. 其中竖着的木条叫stud, 大概每个60到80厘米就有一条. 横着的防止错位和变形的叫 nogin大概也是从上往下每80厘米有一条.&nbsp;&nbsp;<br/>就是这个nogin对从墙内走线造成最大问题. 每堵墙大概有2.2到2.6米高, 也就是多半有一到两条nogin横在中间, 要让线穿至墙脚就意味着要在nogin上钻孔穿线. 可是由于nogin离天花板有一段距离, 钻孔的难度较高, 一般有两种方法: <br/><br/>第一种是直接从阁楼或屋顶(揭开瓦后)找到墙顶后使用极长的钻头钻. 这一方法的缺点是长钻头贵, 钻时要保持角度垂直, 挑战性挺高. 同时风险也不小, 因为你看不到墙内有什么东西, 万一钻到电线, 管道之类的就麻烦了.&nbsp;&nbsp;<br/><br/>第二种是使用stud sensor在墙上找到nogin的位置后, 在其上(或下)位置直接在墙上(plaster)开一孔, 大致可以伸入电钻然后再在nogin上开孔. 开完孔走完线后再补墙. 这个操作起来也挺复杂. <br/><br/>stud sensor可以在以上的部分工具照片中看到, 就是红色的夹线钳后面的黄柄物体.<br/><br/>总而言之, 内墙比较难操作. <br/><br/>再看外墙. 外墙的结构得看是双层砖还是单层砖. 双层的现在新房子比较少见(成本因素?), 旧房子如果是两层楼的话, 可能一楼会是.就像我这个房子一样。双层砖的话, 我也还不明白怎样才能走线. 所幸还没遇上有这需要的场合。所以这里只能谈一谈我对单层砖墙的经验。<br/><br/>单层砖墙的结构从外到内一般是: 砖 -&gt; 隔热层(铝箔) -&gt; stud -&gt; plaster. 在砖和隔热层之间有大概5到10厘米的空隙 (cavity)。在此空隙内，除了可能有建筑时时掉进去的废料之外，一般没有任何障碍, 一根线可以从顶走到底，所以是家庭布线中最常见的走线选择。我这次在书房, 家庭活动室，和主卧室都是走它们的外墙. 看照片: <br/>屋顶 <img src="http://www.bluestrait.com/bluegallery/pictures/2007_11_cabling/IMG_0524_m.JPG" border="0" alt=""/><br/><br/><img src="http://www.bluestrait.com/bluegallery/pictures/Misc/IMG_0525_1024.JPG" border="0" alt=""/><br/>照片是从家庭活动室位置的屋顶上移开瓦后从上往下拍的, 不是很清楚. 但是勉强可以看到右边黑色rg6和白色的cat6就是一直往下深入外墙的砖和里面的隔热层之间的空隙中, 最后直达预先在房内墙脚开的孔. 房内的情形请看下面照片: <br/><img src="http://www.bluestrait.com/bluegallery/pictures/Misc/IMG_0523_1024.JPG" border="0" alt=""/><br/><br/>在这张照片中你可能还注意到了网线和rg6都是固定在一个黄色长条上, 对了, 这根黄色塑料长条就是居家旅行, 杀人灭口之必备工具: yellow tongue! 此物长约3.4米, 2厘米宽, 5毫米厚, 坚固, 同时又有恰到好处的柔韧性, 最适宜在狭窄的空间内捅, 推, 探索, 甚至可以绕过障碍.&nbsp;&nbsp;你可以看到几乎所有电工都会随车带上几根(因为有时可能它会不小心掉进空隙, 难以拾回). 本地电工有时会叫它 &#34;snake&#34;. <br/><br/>-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------<br/>题外话: yellow tongue的来历<br/>实际上这个铺线利器只是一个木板业的附属品. 它最初是在大批包装的夹板(plywood)中用来将夹板分隔开以免其互相挤压导致损坏的一个分隔材料. 但是由于其特有的柔韧性和耐磨的特点, 因此被广大电业工人发挥其聪明才智, 用在了布线上. <br/><br/>至于其名字的来历, 据我本人的考证和现场调查, 是因为这儿最常见的plywood的牌子叫yellow tongue. 这个你可以去离你最近的bunning&#39;s warehouse,&nbsp;&nbsp;到plywood 的堆放处瞧一眼便知. <br/>-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------<br/><br/>Yellow tongue 的使用, 这是最关键的布线手段. 相信聪明的你已经从照片中看出端倪. <br/><br/>yelllow tongue的 基本使用方法就是将牵引绳或线材用电工胶布牢固地固定在一端, 然后利用yellow tongue本身的韧性将其捅过狭窄地段, 到达你预定的出线口, 然后再在该出现口将其拉出, 顺带就将牵引绳或线材拉通了。<br/><br/>如果空隙本身比较宽敞, 你可以考虑同时拉数根线. 反之可能一根一根的啦更加可行。<br/><br/>牵引绳的概念在本文是第一次出现吧？它基本上就是一根绳子，作用是用于后续的拉线工作。可能专业人士有他们的叫法,但我姑且就叫它牵引绳吧. 在特别狭窄的地方, 由于yellow tongue本身较宽, 它自己就比较勉强才能通过.这时候细的多的牵引绳就可以派上用场: 先用yellow tongue将牵引绳从入口引到出口, 解开yellow tongue后,剩下的真正的线材的拉引就由牵引绳完成. <br/><br/>几个有关牵引绳的特别注意事项: <br/>- 绳子本身不用太粗, 但是应该足够牢固, 我用的是从bunnings买来的大概30块100米一卷的尼龙绳. <br/>- 牵引绳的长度应该起码是从入口到出口距离的两倍半. 这样才可能做到两个方向上都可以拉线. <br/>- 牵引绳的两头应该找地方固定住. 以避免在拉扯时不小心拉进空隙, 在也用不了了。 <br/>- 拉线工作完成后, 牵引绳应该留在该处, 已备以后使用.<br/><br/>实际使用中是否使用牵引绳还是直接使用yellow tongue需要视具体情况而定. 在我这次的布线经历中, 各种情况都几乎碰到了:<br/>- 从储藏室引线上阁楼时, 空隙不规则, 长而窄. 我的方法是先用yellow tonue拉上牵引线, 然后通过牵引线从阁楼的将所有线一根一根地逐一拉上. <br/>- 从屋顶下线到书房时， 也是走牵引线， 然后逐根拉下到书房的出口。 <br/>- 从屋顶到家庭活动室，空隙较宽畅， 但中间似乎有些障碍。 我一开始先拉了一根牵引线，然而后来用牵引线拉时经常在半路被卡住， 最后还是用将电视线直接绑在yellow tongue上， 利用yellow tongue的韧性捅开一条路最后完成的。<br/><br/>从屋顶上放线是一个需要两个人的工作，具体过程如下：<br/><br/>1. 首先在房间墙上预先设定好的开口处先开口，具体做法请看下一章。<br/>2. 第一个人在屋顶上(或者Attic内，但一般Attic内较为狭窄，活动不方便）预定的出口正上方掀开瓦，将线材/牵引绳固定在yellow tongue的一段，然后往下捅yellow tongue。<br/>3. 第二个人借助于电筒在房间里的开口处观察，并指挥上面的人移动yellowtongue，目标就是让它出现在开口处可以看见并够着的地方。一旦看见了yellowtongue，下面的人就要及时抓住然后把它拽出来。有时下面会比较难以判断yellowtongue的位置或者够不到，这时候可以使用一根铁丝：一头弯成钩状，整根铁丝弯成L型，然后伸入空隙内尝试寻找或钩住yellowtongue。这个工作需要两个人的配合，耐心，和一点运气。:-)<br/><br/><a href="http://www.bluestrait.com/blog/article.asp?id=56" rel="external">DIY家庭布线工程 3 &#34;上房揭瓦&#34;</a><br/><a href="http://www.bluestrait.com/blog/article.asp?id=58" rel="external">DIY家庭布线工程 5 &#34;凿壁术&#34;</a>]]></description>
		</item>
		
			<item>
			<link>http://www.bluestrait.com/blog/article.asp?id=56</link>
			<title><![CDATA[DIY家庭布线工程 3 &#34;上房揭瓦&#34;]]></title>
			<author>bluestrait@gmail.com(黄敏)</author>
			<category><![CDATA[DIY]]></category>
			<pubDate>Thu,07 Aug 2008 11:02:13 +0800</pubDate>
			<guid>http://www.bluestrait.com/blog/default.asp?id=56</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[项目起始, 经过多番调查研究, 我确定布线基本方案是:<br/>1. 星型网络, 汇聚点在楼下储藏室, 因为那儿最凉快, 同时也可以消灭噪音。<br/>2. 所有到楼上房间的线都将先通到楼上天花板上, 屋顶之下的阁楼(attic), 然后走到楼上的各个房间顶上, 再下放至房间的选定的墙内。<br/><br/><strong>屋顶的结构</strong><br/>澳洲这边的房子(包括house, townhouse, unit等等)的屋顶结构按照从上到下顺序一般是这样: <br/>-&nbsp;&nbsp;屋顶的瓦<br/>- 支撑瓦的梁<br/>- 阁楼(attic): 这儿就是你的活动空间。里面一般布有空调/暖气管道, 和其它电路（家电，电话线，警报系统，吊灯等等）。有些老式的房子还把电热水器和电视天线装在这里面。<br/>- 隔热层(insulation, 如果有的话 ): 有的insulation像棉絮一样（如以下照片所示）, 有的是一块一块的像豆腐干一样, 大致40cmx100cm见方. <br/>- 天花板。每一个房子的天花板总有一处装有一个小活动窗口，以供你爬进阁楼做维护工作。一般这个窗口会安装在洗澡间或洗衣间的天花板上。窗口照片：<br/><img src="http://www.bluestrait.com/bluegallery/pictures/2007_11_cabling/IMG_0641_m.jpg" border="0" alt=""/><br/><br/><br/>阁楼照片: <br/><img src="http://www.bluestrait.com/bluegallery/pictures/Misc/IMG_0643%20%28Custom%29.JPG" border="0" alt=""/><br/>阁楼内最高处可能有1.3米, 可以勉强弯腰站立行走, 其他大部分地方必须蹲行, 甚至爬行。在其内行动时要随时注意脑袋不要碰到房梁。同时还要小心放脚: 脚只能落在木条上否则很可能会踩穿天花板, 直落地板，还要避免踩到已有各种线路上。 <br/><br/>对于这结构我倒并不完全陌生, 因为四年前我有过几天在夏天里在这里面的工作经验: 我上一个房子的阁楼里是我自己爬进去铺的隔热层(insulation)。那几天的工作经验至今记忆犹新: 那种在封闭闷热的空间内小心腾挪,艰难爬行的痛苦滋味简直就不摆了! (上次我的一只爬山靴的鞋底都烤化了一半, 至今不太明白是怎么发生的, 可能是踩在一只射灯的转换器上?)<br/><br/>搞清楚屋顶结构后，我们仍然需要找到以下三个问题的答案:<br/>1. 如何将所有网线从楼下储藏室集中穿过水泥的隔层, 通过楼上房间, 然后送至阁楼?<br/>2. 如何将网线从阁楼下放至楼上的的各个房间的墙内?<br/>3. 如何在墙上固定面板(wall plate)?<br/><br/><strong>如何将所有网线从楼下集中穿过水泥的隔层, 通过楼上房间, 然后送至阁楼?</strong><br/>通过网上的研究, 调查自家的房屋结构,最终答案:<br/><br/>当初房主装中央热冷空调时, 为了安装一根巨粗无比的管道从楼下到阁楼, 已经在储藏室的一个小隔间里向上打通了水泥地板, 然后通过楼上的主卧室的一个衣柜, 直抵阁楼. 经调查发现管道边上和地板之间还有些缝隙, 应该足够网线和电视线通过. <br/>下面是从储藏室的小隔间往上拍的照片:<br/><br/><img src="http://www.bluestrait.com/bluegallery/pictures/Misc/IMG_0589%20%28Custom%29.jpg" border="0" alt=""/><br/> <br/>照片中左上灰色者是包裹着楼层间的水泥隔层的锡铁皮, 而左边是十多根白色的CAT6和黑色的RG6, 右边黄色及用胶布裹住者即为空调管道。如果没有这现成的空隙, 恐怕就得想办法自己在这钢筋水泥上钻洞, 那工程量和难度就不得而知了。<br/><br/>下面是从阁楼里对着空调管道的出口处拍的照片:<br/><br/><img src="http://www.bluestrait.com/bluegallery/pictures/Misc/IMG_0642%20%28Custom%29.JPG" border="0" alt=""/><br/> <br/>可以看到所有线从其侧面伸出, 然后分布到各个房间的顶上。<br/><br/><a href="http://www.bluestrait.com/blog/article.asp?id=55" rel="external">DIY家庭布线工程 2 &#34;为什么不走无线?&#34;</a><br/><a href="http://www.bluestrait.com/blog/article.asp?id=57" rel="external">DIY家庭布线工程 4 &#34;穿墙术&#34;</a>]]></description>
		</item>
		
			<item>
			<link>http://www.bluestrait.com/blog/article.asp?id=55</link>
			<title><![CDATA[DIY家庭布线工程 2 &#34;为什么不走无线?&#34;]]></title>
			<author>bluestrait@gmail.com(黄敏)</author>
			<category><![CDATA[DIY]]></category>
			<pubDate>Thu,07 Aug 2008 11:00:02 +0800</pubDate>
			<guid>http://www.bluestrait.com/blog/default.asp?id=55</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[<strong>&#34;为什么不走无线?&#34;</strong><br/><br/>绝大部分人包括我LD听到我的布线想法后第一个问题就是这个。走有线的原因有二: <br/><br/>我家的主要的网络电器(参看<a target="_blank" href="http://www.bluestrait.com/blog/article.asp?id=95" rel="external">家里的电脑们</a>）有: <br/>- 我的主工作PC, workhorse: Windows XP, 游戏, 上网, Photoshop, 写程序, 电影格式转换, 全在这. <br/>- 文件服务器 (Windows 2K server, 2TB HD, 存有我的几乎所有数据, 包括: 音乐, 电影, 照片, 文件档案). <br/>- PVR (i.e. Personal Video Recorder = High definition set top box + Harddrive recorder): <br/>- Dell XPS1330 (Vista, wireless most of time);<br/>- HTPC （家庭影院电脑）;<br/>- 两个 PocketPC (Wireless);<br/>- Wii (Wireless);<br/><br/>网络交换设备: <br/>- D-Link ADSL modem<br/>- Netgear Wireless router<br/>- HP Procurve 8-port Gigabit Switch<br/>- Intel 20-port 10/100M Switch. <br/><br/>在工作PC, 文件服务器, 和PVR三者之间, 文件传输非常频繁, 而且数量巨大。PVR录下的高清电影每部均在8G以上，文件服务器上的raw格式的照片每张也有30MB左右。 基于cat 6的Gigabit有线网络将会很好的满足这一需要。而无线网络最高实际速度能达到50Mb就不错了，更何况无线网络收外界因素影响太大了。例如我们家楼上和楼下之间隔层太厚, 楼下基本上收不到楼上的无线信号。这位看官要说了, &#34;再在楼下装一个无线 access point不就完了&#34;。可是这个accesspoint和楼上的网络之间还是得靠有线啊, 走线还是必不可少的。所以就干脆全部走有线吧. <br/><br/>再说, 基于IP网络的家用技术越来越多 (video over IP,&nbsp;&nbsp;phone over IP, … ) , 一个可靠的有线网络是所有这些技术的实现基础. <br/><br/>2. 我本来就需要安装新的电视天线和安装一个电视分布网络, 安装网线可以算作附带工作。走一根线和走四根线的差别并不大。<br/><br/>回答了为什么要有线的问题, 下一个问题是<br/><strong>要多少接口才够用? </strong><br/><br/>不提当前热火的DLNA等家庭网络技术, 就现实而言一个房间两个网络接口也不算多。一个用来连接网络设备, 另外一个可以利用来接电话 (事实上是在理论上一根网线可以接最多4电话)。 <br/><br/>而对于视频, 两根线的目的在于: <br/>1.&nbsp;&nbsp;可以方便的输出两种信号。比如一个是Free-To-Air的电视(channel 2/7/9/10etc)，另一个可以用来输出卫星电视或有线电视。当然在理论上，通过使用额外的modulator，一根线也可能加载两种输入,但是其效果据称不是很令人满意, 尤其是当前的HD时代，信号的质量是很重要的。<br/>2.&nbsp;&nbsp;另一可能性是其中一根可以用来做video 输入, 比如监视摄像机, 或其他video输出设备. <br/><br/>所以最终结论是: 每个要连接的房间都至少要有两个电视接口, 两个网络接口.<br/><br/><a href="http://www.bluestrait.com/blog/article.asp?id=54" rel="external">DIY家庭布线工程 1 概况</a><br/><a href="http://www.bluestrait.com/blog/article.asp?id=56" rel="external">DIY家庭布线工程 3 &#34;上房揭瓦&#34;</a>]]></description>
		</item>
		
			<item>
			<link>http://www.bluestrait.com/blog/article.asp?id=54</link>
			<title><![CDATA[DIY家庭布线工程 1 概况]]></title>
			<author>bluestrait@gmail.com(黄敏)</author>
			<category><![CDATA[DIY]]></category>
			<pubDate>Thu,07 Aug 2008 10:57:45 +0800</pubDate>
			<guid>http://www.bluestrait.com/blog/default.asp?id=54</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[前言<br/>------<br/>去年底结束了我的新家的DIY布线工程。计划,研究和实现断断续续花了大概三个礼拜时间, 其中实际工程实现大约花了24个人工小时.到现在基本告一段落. 写此文的目的是总结一下经验教训, 以给自己做个记录，也给各位DIY人士提供一些参考。<br/><br/>事先声明一下，我本人是做软件开发的, 一非电工, 二非电视工, 三非布线工程师。线路设计, 走向选择等等都是自己根据网上研究得来的信息以及自己的实际情况决定的。相信本文在专业人士看来肯定有如此这般的缺陷或问题，如果有方家可以不吝指正，则幸莫大焉. 这厢先谢了。<br/><br/>项目背景<br/>------------<br/>新家是一个两层的house, 房子基本状况和装修都不错, 唯一两个大的问题是: <br/>1. TV点太少: 仅有一个还是在family area, 而且信号极差, 连在settopbox上也还是经常有glitch. <br/>2. 没有有线局域网络。<br/><br/>所以我这个新家的第一个&#34;大&#34;的DIY工程项目就是: &#34;层层通电视, 房房通网络&#34;, 简称全家通. :-) <br/><br/>先介绍一些房子布局: <br/>楼上: 卧室 x 4 (其中靠着主卧的卧室将用作书房), 客厅 (lounge), 餐厅 (dining), 家庭活动室 (kitchen and adjacent family area). <br/>楼下: 储藏室, 娱乐室 (rumpus, 未来主要作为家庭影院), 车房 x 3<br/><br/>楼下墙体是double brick，楼上墙体是single brick，楼层间是水泥隔层。房子本身是一个欧洲builder移民将近40年前给自己盖的, 所以号称用材不错, 结构非常坚固. 不过这个好处已给布线带来麻烦, 容后再述. <br/><br/>项目目标<br/>------------<br/>- 建立一个星型(放射型)的gigabit局域网，和RG6电视网络, 具有良好的扩展性。<br/>- 楼下储藏室为所有线路的汇聚点和分布点. 所有网线和电视线在此分开和终结。这里将安装电视splitter, 网络交换器 (Switch)，文件服务器等等。<br/>- 以下房间: 书房, 客厅, 家庭活动室, 娱乐室, 主卧，每间联通, 在墙上增加一个面板, 上面布设: <br/>网络接口: CAT6 x 2 <br/>电视接口: RG6 x 2 <br/><br/>项目花费<br/>------------ <br/>总投资成本最终大约为AUD$1,000, 相比之前从几家布线contractor(cabler)得到的报价而言大约节省了1,500 到2,500左右. <br/><br/>实现细节<br/>------------<br/>先预览一些图片: <br/><br/>线材: <br/>电视线: Altronics RG6 Quad Screened 100M roll x 2 , <br/>网线: Dyna-Link CAT 6 solid&nbsp;&nbsp;305M x 1. <br/><img src="http://www.bluestrait.com/bluegallery/pictures/Misc/crw_0447_1024.jpg" border="0" alt=""/><br/><br/>部分工具: <br/><img src="http://www.bluestrait.com/bluegallery/pictures/Misc/IMG_0494_1024.JPG" border="0" alt=""/><br/><br/>书房墙上开的孔和拉出的线: <br/><img src="http://www.bluestrait.com/bluegallery/pictures/Misc/IMG_0486_1024.JPG" border="0" alt=""/><br/><br/>安装好连接头的网线和电视线: 网线连接头为 HPM RJ45 CAT 6 JACK, 电视线使用 HPM F81 RG6 JACK. <br/><img src="http://www.bluestrait.com/bluegallery/pictures/Misc/IMG_0485_1024.jpg" border="0" alt=""/><br/><br/>安装好了的面板: rg6 电视接头上安装了终结器 (terminating plug). 注意左边的是原有的相当丑陋的电插板. 以后可能会把它换掉. <br/><img src="http://www.bluestrait.com/bluegallery/pictures/Misc/IMG_0530_1024.JPG" border="0" alt=""/><br/><br/><a href="http://www.bluestrait.com/blog/article.asp?id=55" rel="external">DIY家庭布线工程 2 &#34;为什么不走无线?&#34;</a>]]></description>
		</item>
		
			<item>
			<link>http://www.bluestrait.com/blog/article.asp?id=18</link>
			<title><![CDATA[[zt] DIY woodworking: woodworking start kit]]></title>
			<author>bluestrait@gmail.com(黄敏)</author>
			<category><![CDATA[DIY]]></category>
			<pubDate>Fri,18 Jul 2008 02:18:19 +0800</pubDate>
			<guid>http://www.bluestrait.com/blog/default.asp?id=18</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[Arry mate... GMC arent so much rubbish as much as whats called the lower end of the tool spectrum... some people will stand by them while others will dish them every chance they get.<br/><br/>IF the GMC was what you thought would be the best option when you bought it then so be it... accept it and use it for the short life span it has o&#114; may have.<br/><br/>The first saw should have been a hand saw second should have been as BobL says a hand held circular saw and as Graheme said the 6in for the first... this would have given you some experience using one while not using a big one with more grunt more bite and therefore more weight and chance for bloodletting.<br/><br/>But you went and bought a Jigsaw? no problem dont get discouraged and toss it away (who said GMC was crap? they serve a purpose) learn to use it... they are actually a pretty good unit for mdf and ply cutting especially if you have curves to cut. So stick it in the kit and go back to the shop again<br/><br/>So without breaking the bank lets get some startup tools!!<br/><br/>Price? You havent given us a price range so Im going to assume since you got GMC the first time either through ignorance bad judgement o&#114; bad advice so we will work around and a little above that range okay?<br/><br/>You will need the small circular saw... so get a Makita as Greame says and djstimber links you to... for the starter the 6in is a good starting point but remember your limited by the blade size and the motor strength as to how thick a peice of timber your going to be able to cut... eventually you can work up to a nice big MATEBO!<br/><br/>You will need a drill... get a Makita o&#114; Ryobi hand held power drill... Id stick with Makita and not be tempted by the fancy smanshy B&amp;D Firestorm range as I was they are simply pure crap and wont last... get one with a keyed chuck again dont be tempted by the no chuck ones!!<br/><br/>Okay battery operated... you will find a battery operated drill as handy as hell so get an 18V one with double batteries!... dont bother with anything less because in my experience they are bloody useless... okay you could go get a 14V one and be reasonably happy but as the drill will be used a hell of a lot may as well get one thats not going to die choke and croak in a peice of Jarrah eh?<br/><br/>Another way Ive found with the battery powered ones is to buy the cheep kits they put out Ryobi Makita etc I got one that had an 18V drill with 2 batteries plus a cross cut saw for $99 but realize the saws value!! its not meant to cut whoppin great lengths of anything but for small stuff its handy thats all handy... FSIL got a kit with a 4 tools in it and loves it uses it constantly and abuses the heck out of it cost of as I recall about $120 so look around and choose your kit remembering its simple its not meant for HARD work o&#114; even constant work but it will be handy for some jobs<br/><br/>A good hand held sander... Id go for one of the 1/3 sheet o&#114;bital flat rectangle rubber based ones Ryobi is what I have had for over 10 years and its a beauty... initially I wouldnt bother with a belt sander o&#114; a mouse thing stick with the 1/3 sheet sander and get a mess of sheets for it as your new Id not bother with the expensive material backed sheets yet just get a lot of cheep sheets to learn with from the course to the finest one you can find<br/><br/>You will also need a couple of those table vice things... small table with the top in two peices that you wind the two winders to make the top peices clamp up? gawd I cant remember their names now but anyway you will see them... handy as all hell... seriously handy... the tops are a good height Ive tossed the mdf crap on the top and replaced them with Jarrah helps a lot... and gives you a light clamping pressure for those small jobs... get a couple so you can lay your work across them until you make your saw horses.<br/><br/>What else? okay you could get one of those drill press attachments... just make sure the drill you buy will fit into the collet of the thing dont assume it will fit CHECK it does fit... this is a cheep way of getting a drill press before you buy one down the track<br/><br/>A bandsaw? no dont be tempted yet and definantly dont get a GMC one from bunnys they are crap.. wait get used to the tools weve scored today then if you need one o&#114; think it would be helpfull go to Carbatex o&#114; one of the other specialist woodworking machine places and research their equipment... remember though much of it will come from the same factory in china o&#114; taiwan and be painted and badged differently<br/><br/><br/>Id also suggest you pick up a couple of steel rules (1 mtr and 1ft) a couple of different sized straight edge a try square o&#114; two and a couple of tape measures an a bunch of pencils... get the best you can get pay the extra for the better quality for these... as you will use these more than anything else... eventually you will need other things like sliding bevel marking guages etc but were going for basic here so leave them till later<br/><br/>Well that should get you started... probably all up? around $1000 maybe less maybe slightly more... but you could dro&#112; a few things of the list and cost will dro&#112; to around $500<br/><br/>So to me anyways your basic startup kit as above should set up back between $500 and $1000 thats the basic no frills not quite gutter level cheep but not anything special either... this would go through the roof easily if you so choose.<br/><br/>Keep asking questions mate... really seriously ask the questions!! were not perfect and individually we dont know everything nor profess to but collectively theres not much that we dont know... so ask away wait be patient and when the answers come wait until you have a concensus and then go check out what we have said for yourself... check mate check check and recheck then do what you decide and be content knowing it was your choice and an informed one.<br/><br/>Oh and include in your budget... blades!! damned if I know how many times when Ive bought a new saw Ive forgotten to get extra blades so add a bit for blades for the saws okay... then when one goes blunt as old larry on Sat night you wont have to wait till mondy arvo after work to get one to finish the job ]]></description>
		</item>
		
			<item>
			<link>http://www.bluestrait.com/blog/article.asp?id=14</link>
			<title><![CDATA[[zt] How to do tiling]]></title>
			<author>bluestrait@gmail.com(黄敏)</author>
			<category><![CDATA[DIY]]></category>
			<pubDate>Fri,18 Jul 2008 01:46:27 +0800</pubDate>
			<guid>http://www.bluestrait.com/blog/default.asp?id=14</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[<h2><a target="_blank" href="http://www.johnsontiles.com.au/faq-tiles-flooring.htm">http://www.johnsontiles.com.<wbr></wbr>au/faq-tiles-flooring.htm</a></h2>
<h2>1. Q: What's a good approach to DIY Floor Tiling ?</h2>
<p><strong>A: See our step-by step floor tiling instructions below   : </strong></p>
<p><strong>Step 1.</strong> It is recommended that floor tiling is set out from the middle of the floor so that any cuts are to the outside of the layout. Spread an area of adhesive with a solid-bed notched floor trowel and firmly press the first tile into the adhesive.</p>
<p><strong>Step 2</strong> When starting a new area of tiling it is important to check that the tile is correctly bedded into the adhesive without any voids. Use a trowel to lift the tile to check coverage.</p>
<p><strong>Step 3</strong> The adhesive must be evenly applied and in contact with the tile and base to assure longterm adhesion and performance. If necessary re-trowel the adhesive and replace the tile firmly into the adhesive bed.</p>
<p><strong>Step 4</strong> At the edge of the tiled area check the measurement to assess any irregularity in the wall and the cut required.</p>
<p><strong>Step 5</strong> Set the edge tile upside down and mark the cut on the reverse. This should then be transferred to the face before cutting. The cut edge is set to the room edge.</p>
<p><strong>Step 6</strong> Floor tiles should be cut using a tile cutter. After marking the measurement, scribe and break using the cutter.</p>
<p><strong>Step 7</strong> Awkward shapes to fit tiles round pipes and other room fittings should be cut using tile nippers. Irregularities in the cut can be smoothed off with a tile file. Protective goggles should be worn during cutting.</p>
<p><strong>Step 8</strong> When the adhesive is dry, usually within 24-hours, the floor can be grouted. Spread grout over the area working it well into the joints with a spreading tool. Clean off excess grout in accordance with the manufacturers instructions.</p>
<p><img height="905" width="640" src="http://www.johnsontiles.com.au/images/Technical%20section_p12_LRG.gif" alt="" /></p>
<h2>2. Q: How to do wall tiling ?</h2>
<p>See our step-by step wall tiling instructions below :</p>
<p><img height="905" width="640" src="http://www.johnsontiles.com.au/images/Technical%20section_p13_LRG.gif" alt="" /></p>]]></description>
		</item>
		
</channel>
</rss>
